EUMM. Air conditioning unit Catalogue

EUMM Air conditioning unit Catalogue

Page 1 Air conditioning unit Page Design... General survey Quick selection tables...6 Some design features...11 Energy Recovery REGOTERM Rotary energy exchangers...14 General survey, unit combinations...16 Special order...5 Contents, Unit sections and accessories...53 Installation...130 Installation examples...131 Pressure drop...134 Acoustic data...171 Fans in general...149 Fan chart Specification Motor data...173 REGOTERM EUMF Recovery unit...11 EUQA, EUMQ Humidifier...19 Specification...5 Specifications are subject to alteration without notice.

Page A unit for all air handling requirements The EU is a modern, high-specification air handling unit with all of the functional sections needed to meet virtually any air handling requirement. The sturdy frame members and solid aluminium corner pieces form a very stable framework which is well suited to the full range of sizes. All of the functional components are made by us and conform to current standards and relevant guidelines. Computer-aided selection using a program based on a series of highly complex algorithms allows us to optimize selection and ensure that the unit offered conforms to the customer s requirements. The EU unit spans all fields of application for standardized air handling units. Sturdy framework with box-section steel frame members Solid aluminium, powder-coated corner pieces with no sharp edges mm thick double-skin, flush-fitting panels Non-hygroscopic, rigid sheet, mineral wool insulation with a density of kg/m 3 Fully enclosed panels Fully demountable casing Multi-section blocks to reduce site assembly time Stainless steel casing available as a standard alternative Painted casing available as an option The EU series Air handling units up to 1.7 metres high and.6 metres wide, for air flows up to 14.1 m 3 /s ( 400 m 3 /h). Unit casing consisting of box-section frame members of galvanized or stainless sheet steel, cast aluminium corner pieces and panels of double-skin design made of 0.7 or 1.0 mm thick galvanized or stainless sheet steel sections with mm thick insulation sandwiched between them.the quality of the EU unit is characterized by:

Page 3

Page 4 DESIGN Central air handling unit with closed box section frame members and aluminium corner pieces, clad with mm thick panels. The unit sections can be combined to suit the demands of almost any application. Air flow range: 0.5 m 3 /s - 14.1 m 3 /s Total pressure rise: up to 3000 Pa Double skin panels with mm mineral wool mat sandwiched between the sheet steel. Depending on the unit size, several unit sections can be assembled either into one complete unit or into multi section blocks, provided that the maximum length or for transport or installation is not exceeded. Several units can be stacked on top of one another without the need for additional support structures. The inspection doors with lever-operated locks and hinges are easy to open. Heat transfer coefficient, mean value U = 1. W/m C Sound attenuation, mean value De(A) = 31 db(a) Max. pressure differential: 0 Pa max. working temperatur: 70 C Tightness class as per CEN A

DESIGN Page 5 Design features Cold rolled and galvanized or stainless sheet steel box-section frame members interconnected by means of aluminium corner pieces. Panels of double skin sheet steel with mineral wool sandwiched between the sheet steel. Frame Special box section frame members made of 1.5 mm thick cold rolled, galvanized sheet steel, or alternatively 1.5 mm thick stainless steel AISI 304. Cladding 0.70 mm or 1 mm thick sheet steel panels with mm thick mineral wool mat sandwiched between them. Surface treatment anti corrosion treatment All steel parts are galvanized. Stainless steel version is also available as standard.

GENERAL SURVEY QUICK SELECTION Page 6 Max. air flow m 3 /s (m 3 /h) Dimensions Air cooler, Air cooler, Outer Cross- Heat recovery Heat recovery unit Evaporative Filter dimensions, sectional Size Fan Filter unit with droplet without droplet Humidifier modules mm area eliminator eliminator Face area 4 m/s 3 m/s m Height Width m 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 1.6 1.4 1.4 1.0 0.9 (5800) (00) (00) (3600) (3300).4.1.1 1.5 1.4 (8600) (7600) (7600) (5400) (4900) 3..8.8.1 1.8 (11600) (1000) (1000) (7560) (6600) 3.5 3.1 3.0.3.4 (1600) (11300) (11000) (860) (80) 4.8 4. 4. 3.1 3. (17300) (1500) (1500) (11160) (110) 6.0 5.3 5.3 4.0 4.0 (1600) (1900) (1900) (14400) (14400) 7.0 6.3 6.4 4.8 4.8 (500) (700) (3000) (17300) (17300) 6.5 5.6 5.4 4.0 4.4 (3400) (000) (190) (14400) (15700) 8.5 7.0 6.7 5.0 5.4 (30600) (500) (400) (18100) (19400) 10.0 8.4 8. 6.1 6.6 (36000) (3000) (9400) (000) (3600) 11.0 8.8 8.6 6.4 7.1 (39600) (310) (30900) (300) (5600) 1.0 10.5 10.4 7.8 8.6 (4300) (37800) (370) (8100) (31000) 17.0 14.0 14.1 10.6 11.5 (6100) (400) (900) (38100) (41300) 0.36 774 804 0.47 0.54 774 1104 0.67 0.7 774 1404 0.87 0.81 1074 1104 0.97 1.08 1074 1404 1.6 1.35 1074 1704 1.55 1.6 1074 004 1.85 1.44 1374 1404 1.65 1.80 1374 1704.03.16 1374 004.41.5 1674 1704.51.70 1674 004.98 3.60 1674 604 3.93

GENERAL SURVEY QUICK SELECTION Page 7 FUNCTIONAL SECTIONS Lengths in mm, (Weights in kg, shown in brackets) EULB EUDB EULF EUVA EUVB EUVC EUVD EUVE Centrifugal Centrifugal Centrifugal Con- Connection section Mixing section Mixing and exhaust section Intake / Exhaust fan fan fan nection with flanged damper with flanged damper with flanged damper section Direct-driven Type 1 With Type Type Type Fan sizes Fan sizes Fan sizes flanged l l I 3 3 damper 1. 3.5 01 04 1 14 0 03 F F F 900 1000 900 900 900 15 00 0 0 0 0 300 (85) (95) (145) (160) (85) (15) (5) (40) (45) (30) (45) (40) 1100 1100 800 1000 1100 15 00 400 400 400 400 300 (115) (10) (140) (185) (115) (0) (30) (45) () (35) () (45) 1100 1300 800 1100 1100 15 00 400 400 400 400 300 (1) (165) (145) (40) (1) (5) (40) () (60) (35) (60) (60) 1100 1300 1000 1100 1100 15 300 0 0 0 0 300 (135) (160) (195) (40) (135) (30) () (60) (65) (45) (65) (65) 1400 10 100 1300 1400 15 300 600 600 600 600 300 (00) (5) (95) (315) (00) (35) (60) (80) (90) (60) (90) (75) 1300 1600 1100 1400 1300 15 300 0 0 0 0 300 (40) (75) (65) (410) (40) (40) (70) (80) (95) (55) (95) (85) 1300 1100 15 300 0 0 0 0 (70) (370) () (80) (90) (115) (60) (95) 10 1600 1300 1400 10 15 300 700 700 700 700 300 () (75) (330) (415) () (45) (70) (100) (115) (75) (115) (85) 1600 1800 1400 10 1600 15 300 700 700 700 700 300 (95) (385) (45) (5) (95) () (80) (115) (130) (85) (130) (105) 10 1900 1300 1600 10 15 300 700 700 700 700 300 (380) (430) (495) (590) (380) (60) (90) (130) (1) (90) (1) (115) 1800 1900 10 1600 1800 15 300 900 900 900 900 300 (410) (435) (570) (6) (410) (60) (90) (1) (170) (110) (170) (115) 1900 00 1600 1800 1900 15 300 900 900 900 900 300 (460) (540) (630) (840) (460)) (70) (105) (170) (190) (15) (190) (135) 1800 0 1600 1800 15 300 900 900 900 900 300 (5) (840) (785) (5) (90) (10) (00) (5) (175) (5) (1)

GENERAL SURVEY QUICK SELECTION Page 8 FUNCTIONAL SECTIONS Lengths in mm, (Weights in kg, shown in brackets) EUTC EUPA EUPB EUPC EUPD EUME EUES EUMK EUML Empty section Filter, Filter, Filter Filter/ Air Air Air heater, Air heater, pleated bag bag Coalescor heater heater electric electric (short) (long) for for Low temp. Imp. safety hot steam type class, Eexe T3 Lengths water Size 100, 00, 300, 400, 0, Output Output Output variant 600, 700, 800, 900 var. 4 var. 1 1 3 4 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 (5) (10) (15) (0) (5) 00 400 700 300 00 00 400 600 (30 (35) (40) (45) (0) (30) (45) (30) (5) (35) (40) () (60) (75) (5) (10) (0) (5) (30) 00 400 700 (300) 00 00 400 600 (35) (40) () (55) (5) (35) (55) (40) (35) (40) (60) (65) (80) (95) (5) (10) (0) (30) (35) 00 400 700 300 00 00 400 600 (40) () (55) (60) (30) (45) (65) () (40) (45) (70) (80) (100) (10) (10) (15) (0) (30) (35) 00 400 700 300 300 00 400 600 (40) () (55) (60) (35) (45) (65) (60) (55) (45) (75) (85) (105) (130) (10) (15) (5) (30) (40) 00 400 700 300 300 00 400 600 (45) (55) (60) (70) (35) (55) (80) (60) (65) () (95) (105) (130) (160) (10) (15) (5) (35) (45) 00 400 700 300 300 00 400 600 () (60) (70) (75) (40) (60) (85) (65) (70) (55) (110) (130) (160) (190) (15) (0) (30) (40) (45) 00 400 700 300 00 400 1) 600 (55) (65) (75) (85) () (70) (100) (90) (60) (140) (160) (00) (40) (10) (15) (5) (35) (45) 00 400 700 300 300 00 400 600 () (60) (70) (75) (45) (60) (85) (70) (80) (55) (10) (135) (165) (00) (15) (0) (30) (40) (45) 00 400 700 300 300 00 400 600 (55) (65) (75) (85) () (70) (100) (75) (90) (60) (140) (160) (00) (40) (15) (0) (30) (40) () 00 400 700 300 300 00 400 600 (60) (70) (80) (95) (55) (80) (110) (80) (105) (65) (160) (185) (35) (80) (15) (5) (30) (40) () 00 400 700 300 300 00 400 600 (60) (70) (80) (95) (60) (80) (115) (90) (110) (135) (170) (190) (40) (90) (15) (5) (35) (45) (55) 0 400 700 300 300 00 400 600 (65) (80) (90) (100) (70) (95) (15) (105) (15) (155) (195) (5) (85) (335) (0) (30) (40) () (65) 00 400 700 300 300 00 400 600 (75) (90) (105) (115) (85) (110) (1) (130) (155) (195) () (85) (365) (430) 1) Not EUML.

GENERAL SURVEY QUICK SELECTION Page 9 FUNCTIONAL SECTIONS Lengths in mm, (Weights in kg, shown in brackets) EUM(N, P) EUQA EUMQ EUMF Air cooler Humidifier, Section for REGOTERM evaporative steam (Weight: var. 06, 10) humidifier EUMD EUMR EUMO DOUVENT REGOVENT Exhaust Air Air Air distribution distribution section Output variant 04, 06 08, 10 c = 1 4 c = 1 4 c = 5 c = 5 c=0 c=1 c=0 c=1 d = 0, 1 d = d = 0, 1 d = 0 600 800 00 400 (95) (130) (70) (13) (15) 0 600 800 00 400 (130) (175) (85) (15) (195) 0 600 800 00 400 (165) (40) (105) (18) (5) 0 600 800 00 400 (165) (35) (105) (18) (310) 0 600 800 00 400 (15) (300) (10) (0) (90) 0 600 800 00 400 (65) (375) (140) () (315) 0 600 00 400 (30) (460) (5) (95) 0 600 800 00 400 (65) (370) (140) () (465) 0 600 800 00 400 (30) (460) (155) (5) (480) 0 600 800 00 400 (375) (590) (170) (7) (535) 0 600 800 00 400 (380) (555) (170) (7) (840) (70) (95) (800) (15) 400 (4) (6) (0) (30) (815) 0 600 800 00 400 (580) (860) () (35) (860) 600 700 700 900 300 400 400 0 ((59) (64) (64) (71) (4) (3) (8) (35) 600 700 700 900 300 400 400 0 (77) (83) (8) (9) (30) (41) (35) (44) 600 700 700 900 300 400 400 0 (97) (104) (10) (116) (37) () (43) (53) 700 700 700 900 300 400 400 0 (109) (114) (109) (13) (41) (56) (48) (60) 700 700 700 900 300 400 400 0 (17) (133) (16) (14) (47) (64) (54) (67) 700 700 700 900 300 400 400 0 (155) (163) (155) (175) (58) (78) (66) (8) 700 700 700 900 300 400 400 0 (181) (191) (180) (04) (66) (89) (75) (93) 600 700 800 1000 300 400 400 0 (15) (168) (164) (184) (60) (80) (68) (84) 600 700 800 1000 300 400 400 0 (178) (198) (191) (15) (69) (93) (79) (97) 600 700 800 1000 300 400 400 0 (07) (9) (19) (48) (79) (106) (89) (110) 600 700 800 1000 300 400 400 0 (05) (7) (19) (46) (81) (108) (91) (11) 600 700 800 1000 300 400 400 0 (36) (6) (51) (8) (9) (14) (103) (17) 600 700 800 1000 300 400 400 0 (98) (330) (314) (354) (115) (154) (18) (156)

GENERAL SURVEY QUICK SELECTION Page 10 Connection dimensions, mm EUVA + EUVB EUVC EUVD EUVE EULB and EUDB EULF Connection Mixing section Mixing and Intake/ Centrifugal fan Centrifugal fan section bb=0, 03, 04 exhaust exhaust section section Size b=1 EUVA EUVB 0 b=1 b=3, 5 bb=01 bb=1 14 Size Outlet Duct conn. Size Outlet Duct conn. 03 B F 0 1 30 31 3 0x 400x 00x 400x 400x 400x 0-: 90 300 0-: 90 300 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-3: 30 400 0x 300x 00x 300x 300x 600x 1-: 360 400 1-: 360 400 800 800 800 800 800 800 1-3: 404 0 0x 300x 00x 300x 300x 600x -: 404 0 -: 404 0 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100-3: 360x455 0 800x 400x 400x 400x 400x 800x 30-: 404 0 30-: 404 0 800 800 800 800 800 800 30-3: 454 0 800x 0x 400x 0x 0x 800x 31-: 4 600 31-: 4 600 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 100 31-3: 570 600 800x 400x 400x 400x 400x 800x 3-: 570 600 3-: 570 600 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 3-3: 640 800 33 800x 400x 400x 400x 400x 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 33-: 714 800 40 41 4 51 1000x 600x 400x 600x 600x 100x 40-: 570 600 40-: 570 600 1000 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 40-3: 640 800 1000x 600x 400x 600x 600x 100x 41-: 640 800 41-: 640 800 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 41-3: 714 800 1000x 600x 400x 600x 600x 100x 4-: 714 800 4-: 714 800 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 4-3: 800 1000 100x 800x 600x 800x 800x 1400x -: 714 800 -: 714 800 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400-3: 800 1000 00x 800x 600x 800x 800x 1400x 51-: 800 1000 51-: 800 1000 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 51-3: 900 1000 400x 800x 600x 800x 800x 1400x 53-: 900 1000 53-: 900 1000 53 000 000 000 000 000 000 1) 53-3: 1000 100 1) Not EUDB

SOME DESIGN FEATURES Page 11 Robust casing The casing is of double-skin design, with a mm thick mineral wool panel sandwiched between galvanized sheet steel or stainless steel panels. The casing is very sturdy and, in its standard design, can withstand an internal pressure or vacuum of up to 0 Pa. Unit sections of the same width can be stacked on top of one another, without the need for additional reinforcement. Fast and simple assembly Fire-resistant materials Hygienic Owing to the double-skin sheet steel casing, the EU has completely smooth surfaces on the inside and the outside, which facilitates cleaning and reduces the risk of the accumulation of dirt and bacteria. Since the insulating material is completely enclosed in sheet steel on the inside, no insulation fibres can be entrained by the air flow. Efficient acoustic and thermal insulation The casing has good acoustic and thermal insulation. The coefficient of heat transmission is 1. W/(m C). Strong, air-tight joints The humidifiers and the heat exchangers are made of fire-resistant materials. The flexible connection at the fan outlet is fire-resistant, and the filter materials are flame-retardant. In the double-skin construction of the casing, mineral wool insulation is sandwiched between sheet steel. As a result of all this, the EU is among the most fire-resistant units available on the market. Base frame To facilitate the installation of unit sections that require drainage such as humidifiers and air coolers, these sections can be mounted on a common base frame. The casing frame of the unit sections are then bolted to the common base frame. In the marine version, the unit is normally delivered as a fully assembled unit on a common base frame, or as a number of blocks, each on its own base frame. The base frame is provided with holes for lifting tubes and with holes located at each end in the cross beams for the fork of a fork-lift truck.

SOME DESIGN FEATURES Page 1 Adjustable dampers Unit sections equipped with two or more dampers include provision for adjustment of the dampers from the outside of the casing. This enables the air flows to be accurately preset at site. Effective mixing The design of the mixing section guarantees effective mixing, without the risk of stratification of air at different temperatures in unit sections further downstream. Sturdy but light inspection panels The inspection panels are equipped with locking handles, and are easy to remove and refit. To simplify opening and closing, the inspection panels are equipped with hinges. The hinges are easy to adjust or if needed to disconnect by loosing the pin. Identification labels for the component unit sections are provided on the inspection side of the unit. The unit sections can be ordered in left-hand or right-hand versions, to suit the installation arrangement at site. Continuously variable air flow control The inlet guide vanes incorporated into the fan inlet can be used for simple control of the air flow and pressure while the fan is running. The fan efficiency is high throughout the control range, which contributes to good operating economy. In some cases, it may be advantageous to employ inlet guide vane control, combined with a two-speed drive motor, in order to improve the operating economy further. Reliable bearings The shafts and impellers are statically and dynamically balanced and are mounted on rolling contact bearings with a long useful life well over 40 000 hours. Fans with good vibration isolation The EU is a silent unit. The fan motors are mounted on a rigid base frame which, in turn, is supported by effective anti-vibration mountings. The mountings are sized to isolate induced and natural frequencies below 8 Hz. Spark-proof design Fans of spark-proof design are available as standard. Reliable anti-freeze thermostat The air coolers are equipped with plugged tappings, through which the sensing element of the anti-freeze thermostat can be fitted into one of the finned tubes. The critical temperature of the liquid is thus measured, instead of the temperature of the surrounding air. Droplet eliminator for air cooler and humidifier The droplet eliminator is made of plastic fins in a stainless steel frame. Water trap The advantage of this special water trap compared to others of more traditional design, is that it has an integral non-return valve. When the water in the water trap has evaporated, there is no need of filling up. To be connected to air coolers in which internal vacuums of up to 800 Pa are generated. 00 ø3 mm o.d.

SOME DESIGN FEATURES Page 13 CROSS-FILL corrugated glass-fibre sheets The corrugations of the glass fibre sheet used for the humidifier fill provide a large contact area between the water and the air. Moreover, the enlarged area provided by the corrugations ensures good water distribution over the entire surface, high efficiency and low pressure drop. In addition, the humidifier length is minimised. REGOTERM rotary heat exchanger The hygroscopic rotor (standard) transfers heat and moisture and has edge-reinforced face surfaces to resist corrosion in marine environments. To facilitate service, the heat exchanger has a withdrawable rotor. In addition, the rotor is available with two alternative foil spacings. This provides excellent opportunities for optimising the efficiency and pressure drop to suit different types of installation. The wider foil spacing reduces the efficiency by 10 percentage units and halves the pressure drop as compared to the standard foil spacing. Easy to service Dependable humidifier economical on water and energy The special humidifier fill is made of hygroscopic glass fibre for high efficiency and low consumption of water and energy. The humidifier is equipped with a droplet eliminator. The water flow is maintained constant by means of a constant flow valve and distributed over the humidifier fills by distribution pipes made of polypropylene. The EU has been designed to facilitate service and maintenance: The filter cassettes and humidifier fills are mounted on slide rails to simplify maintenance or replacement. The humidifier components are easy to dismantle. The smooth interior surfaces are easy to keep clean. All internal components can be withdrawn for inspection and service. Steam humidifer The steam humidifier should be located upstream of the cooling coil to shorten the length of the unit. (Steam is supplied by the central system or a steam generator). Casing with extra efficient sound attenuation In the standard version design, the casing provides good thermal insulation k = 1. W/(m C) and also offers good sound attenuation and fire resistance. To special order, the casing panels can be delivered in a fire proof version for extra good sound attenuation.

REGOTERM ROTARY ENERGY EXCHANGERS Page 14 FläktW oods offers: REGOTERM rotary energy exchanger. The concept of efficiency either temperature efficiency or power efficiency is often used when considering heat or cooling. But neither the temperature efficiency nor the power efficiency can define the percentage energy saving, which is the factor of greatest interest in profitability calculations. For this purpose, it is advisable to employ the Fläkt Woods computer programs to facilitate the calculation work. Since the supply air is often at a lower temperature than the exhaust air, even a modest temperature efficiency can offer significant savings. As an example, a temperature efficiency of % may produce annual energy savings of 80%. Applications Rotary energy exchangers are used for recovering and transferring heat or cooling energy and also moisture from the exhaust air to the supply air. The REGOTERM system is particularly beneficial whenever high temperature and moisture efficiencies are desirable. REGOTERM can be used if the supply and exhaust air ducts can be arranged to converge at one location. REGOTERM Has an aluminium rotor which transfers heat or cooling energy and moisture. The rotor has edgereinforced face surfaces. Has temperature and moisture efficiencies of up to 85%. Is delivered with the electrical components readywired. The rotor can be lifted or rolled out for simplified service. Is equipped with an adjustable purging sector. The hygroscopic rotor offers excellent cooling energy recovery. Runs at constant speed. To special order, the motor can be classified according to the provisions of Lloyd's Register of Shipping or Det norske Veritas. All other components made of stainless steel.

EUMM Air conditioning unit Page 15

GENERAL SURVEY, UNIT COMBINATIONS System desciption The EU air conditioning unit is designed for central treatment of outdoor air or recirculated air. The unit can be equipped with a variety of components, depending on the degree of air treatment required. The main dimensions and s of the most common combinations are presented on the following pages. Page 16 Combinations Symbol Description Page 080 Exhaust air unit Low pressure system 19 081 Compact unit Low pressure system 0, 1 08 Central unit Low pressure system, 3 083 Service unit, single zone Low pressure system 4, 5 084 Central unit Low pressure system 6, 7 085 Central unit, single zone Low pressure system 8, 9 086 Central unit Low pressure system, air cooler for evaporative refrigerant 30, 31 087 Central DUOVENT unit Air cooler for evaporative refrigerant 3, 33 088 Central REGOVENT unit Air cooler for evaporative refrigerant 34, 35

GENERAL SURVEY, UNIT COMBINATIONS Page 17 Combinations Symbol Description Page 089 Central REGOTERM unit Low pressure system, for several zones 36, 37 090 Central REGOTERM unit Low pressure system, 1 or zones 38, 39 091 Central DUOVENT unit High pressure system 40, 41 09 Central REGOVENT unit High pressure system 4, 43 093 Central REGOVENT unit High pressure system 44, 45 094 Central REGOVENT/REGOTERM unit High pressure system, with reheat 46, 47 095 Central REGOVENT/REGOTERM unit High pressure system 48, 49 096 Central DUOVENT/REGOTERM unit High pressure system, 51

Page 18 Factory-wired electrical and control equipment. Labelled cables, well protected in cable troughs.

COMBINATION 080 Page 19 EXHAUST AIR UNIT Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s B 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUMO exhaust air section without smoke damper and the EULB fan section. ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor. A 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 A B Unit width Weight, kg 1405 155 805 15 170 1605 00 95 1105 1605 10 1605 60 1405 1805 80 1605 1105 1805 80 1905 35 1405 005 355 15 1805 385 1705 105 45 1805 005 440 005 395 1405 105 45 105 460 155 1705 305 555 005 5 005 405 615 305 590 1705 405 65 405 655 185 005 705 755 305 795 605 3005 1095

COMBINATION 081 Page 0 COMPACT UNIT Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s B A 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUPA pleated filter, the EUME air heater for hot water in capacity variant 1 and the EULB fan section. ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 081 Page 1 COMPACT UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 A B Unit width Weight, kg 1405 180 805 15 190 1605 30 95 1105 1605 35 1605 85 1405 1805 310 1605 85 1105 1805 30 1905 375 1405 005 400 15 1805 405 1705 105 4 1905 005 475 105 435 1405 05 465 05 0 155 1705 405 590 105 605 005 5 655 405 655 1705 5 675 5 75 185 005 805 805 405 870 605 3105 1155 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size EUME Air heater, c= 1 Capacity variant 3 4 5 EUME Air heater, c= Capacity variant 3 4 5 cc= 01 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 cc= 0 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 EUMK Air cooler, cc= 0 Capacity variant 1 3 4 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 5 10 5 10 10 15 15 35 0 45 5 30 40 55 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 15 5 10 10 0 15 5 5 35 40 55 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 0 5 15 0 30 15 40 5 55 40 70 90 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 5 10 0 30 10 0 30 45 10 35 0 40 70 95 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 10 0 30 10 0 35 45 5 30 10 60 85 115 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 15 0 35 15 30 35 55 5 35 15 55 60 80 110 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 10 15 35 10 15 5 55 0 35 10 55 75 95 135 175 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 0 35 15 30 40 55 5 5 5 45 60 75 105 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 5 45 0 40 45 70 5 30 5 75 95 135 175 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 30 75 0 45 55 75 10 35 5 55 85 100 160 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 30 0 45 65 85 15 30 0 90 110 160 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 0 35 60 5 70 100 0 30 5 105 135 195 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 30 85 40 70 90 130 0 35 0 55 145 180 60 35 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively.

COMBINATION 08 Page CENTRAL UNIT Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. B A 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUPC bag filter, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4 and the EULB fan section. ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 08 Page 3 CENTRAL UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 A B Unit width Weight, kg Block 1, length Block, length 05 70 05 805 305 75 305 405 335 405 95 1105 405 340 405 405 405 405 1405 605 40 605 405 400 405 1105 605 45 605 705 510 705 1405 805 535 805 15 605 600 605 1705 905 630 905 605 005 670 605 805 600 805 1405 905 65 905 905 700 905 155 1705 3105 800 3105 805 85 805 005 305 875 305 3105 875 3105 1705 305 905 305 305 975 305 185 005 35 1060 35 3105 1175 3105 605 3910 1460 1305 605 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size 6 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 8 10 0 10 5 35 1 15 35 45 0 65 30 0 65 31 5 60 80 3 35 80 110 33 45 95 10 40 41 35 80 110 45 95 10 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 4 110 1 115 155 51 65 135 185 53 80 180

COMBINATION 08 Page 4 SERVICE UNIT, SINGLE ZONE Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. B A 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUPC bag filter, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4, the EUME air heater for hot water in capacity variant 1 and the EULB fan section. ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor, air cooler including droplet eliminator. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 083 Page 5 SERVICE UNIT, SINGLE ZONE Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 A B Unit width Weight, kg Block 1, length Block, length 405 90 405 805 5 305 5 605 360 605 95 1105 605 365 605 605 435 605 1405 805 4 805 605 435 605 1105 805 460 805 905 555 905 1405 3005 575 3005 15 805 645 805 1705 3105 680 3105 905 005 745 905 3105 660 3105 1405 305 685 305 305 765 305 155 1705 3510 85 1605 1905 3105 910 3105 005 3610 990 1605 1904 3510 1000 1605 1904 1705 3610 100 1605 004 3610 1110 1605 005 185 005 3910 1190 1605 305 3510 1330 1605 1904 605 410 160 1605 605 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size EUME Air heater, c= 1 Capacity variant 3 4 5 EUME Air heater, c= Capacity variant 3 4 5 cc= 01 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 cc= 0 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 EUMK Air cooler, cc= 0 Capacity variant 1 3 4 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 5 10 5 10 10 15 15 35 0 45 5 30 40 55 10 5 35 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 15 5 10 10 0 15 5 5 35 40 55 70 15 35 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 0 5 15 0 30 15 40 5 55 40 70 90 0 65 30 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 5 10 0 30 10 0 30 45 10 35 0 40 70 95 0 65 31 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 10 0 30 10 0 35 45 5 30 10 45 60 85 115 5 60 80 3 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 15 0 35 15 30 35 55 5 35 15 55 60 80 110 140 35 80 110 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 10 15 35 10 15 5 55 0 35 10 55 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 40 41 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 0 35 15 30 40 55 5 5 5 45 60 75 105 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 5 45 0 40 45 70 5 30 5 75 95 135 175 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 30 75 0 45 55 75 10 35 5 55 85 100 160 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 30 0 45 65 85 15 30 0 90 110 160 10 35 80 110 45 95 10 110 1 115 155 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 0 35 60 5 70 100 0 30 5 105 135 195 45 65 135 185 53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 30 85 40 70 90 130 0 35 0 55 145 180 60 35 80 180

COMBINATION 084 Page 6 CENTRAL UNIT Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. C B 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUVB mixing section, the EUPC bag filter, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4 and the EULB fan section. ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor, air cooler including droplet eliminator. C A 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 084 Page 7 CENTRAL UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 A B C (flange) Unit width Weight, kg Block 1, length Block, length 705 15 300 705 805 805 15 310 805 805 15 375 805 95 1105 805 15 380 805 805 15 4 805 1405 3005 15 470 3005 905 15 470 905 1105 3105 15 495 3105 3305 15 605 3305 1405 3405 15 635 1905 1605 15 3105 15 700 3105 1705 3405 15 705 1905 1605 3105 15 005 815 3105 3610 15 70 005 1605 1405 3710 15 745 005 1705 3710 15 835 005 1705 155 1705 3910 15 95 005 1905 3610 15 980 005 1605 005 4010 15 1030 005 005 4110 15 1045 05 1905 1705 410 15 1070 05 005 410 15 1170 05 005 185 005 4510 15 1 05 305 4110 15 1400 05 1905 605 4810 15 1690 05 605 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size 6 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 8 10 0 10 5 35 1 15 35 45 0 65 30 0 65 31 5 60 80 3 35 80 110 33 45 95 10 40 41 35 80 110 45 95 10 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 4 110 1 115 155 51 65 135 185 53 80 180

COMBINATION 085 Page 8 CENTRAL UNIT, SINGLE ZONE Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. C B 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUVB mixing section, the EUPC bag filter, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4 and the EUME air heater for hot water in capacity variant 1, and the EULB fan section. C A ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor, air cooler including droplet eliminator. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 085 Page 9 CENTRAL UNIT, SINGLE ZONE Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 A B C (flange) Unit width Weight, kg Block 1, length Block, length 905 15 330 905 805 3005 15 340 3005 3005 15 410 3005 95 1105 3005 15 415 3005 3005 15 490 3005 1405 305 15 0 305 3105 15 485 3105 1105 3305 15 510 3305 3610 15 665 104 15 1405 3710 15 690 105 1605 15 3305 15 70 3305 1705 3710 15 790 005 1705 3510 15 005 930 105 1405 3910 15 790 305 1605 1405 4010 15 810 305 1705 4010 15 910 305 1705 155 1705 410 15 1000 305 1905 3910 15 1070 305 1605 005 4310 15 1115 305 005 4410 15 1130 5 1905 1705 4510 15 1160 5 005 4510 15 170 5 005 185 005 4810 15 13 5 305 4410 15 150 5 1905 605 5110 15 180 5 605 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size EUME Air heater, c= 1 Capacity variant 3 4 5 EUME Air heater, c= Capacity variant 3 4 5 cc= 01 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 cc= 0 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 EUMK Air cooler, cc= 0 Capacity variant 1 3 4 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 5 10 5 10 10 15 15 35 0 45 5 30 40 55 10 5 35 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 15 5 10 10 0 15 5 5 35 40 55 70 15 35 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 0 5 15 0 30 15 40 5 55 40 70 90 0 65 30 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 5 10 0 30 10 0 30 45 10 35 0 40 70 95 0 65 31 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 10 0 30 10 0 35 45 5 30 10 45 60 85 115 5 60 80 3 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 15 0 35 15 30 35 55 5 35 15 55 60 80 110 140 35 80 110 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 10 15 35 10 15 5 55 0 35 10 55 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 40 41 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 0 35 15 30 40 55 5 5 5 45 60 75 105 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 5 45 0 40 45 70 5 30 5 75 95 135 175 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 30 75 0 45 55 75 10 35 5 55 85 100 160 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 30 0 45 65 85 15 30 0 90 110 160 10 35 80 110 45 95 10 110 1 115 155 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 0 35 60 5 70 100 0 30 5 105 135 195 45 65 135 185 53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 30 85 40 70 90 130 0 35 0 55 145 180 60 35 80 180

COMBINATION 085 Page 30 CENTRAL UNIT Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. C B 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUVB mixing section, the EUPA pleated filter, the EUME air heater for hot water in capacity variant 1, the EUMP air cooler for evaporative refrigerant in capacity variant 4 and the EULB fan section. C A ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor, air cooler including droplet eliminator. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 086 Page 31 CENTRAL UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 A B C (flange) Unit width Weight, kg Block 1, length 405 15 310 405 805 5 15 30 5 5 15 390 5 95 1105 5 15 395 5 5 15 4 5 1405 705 15 465 705 605 15 455 605 1105 805 15 480 805 3005 15 590 3005 1405 3105 15 615 3105 115 805 15 675 805 1705 3105 15 710 3105 3005 15 005 835 3005 3305 15 715 3305 1405 3510 15 770 1805 3510 15 860 1805 155 1705 3710 15 9 1805 3305 15 1010 3305 005 3010 15 1060 1805 3910 15 1080 005 1705 4010 15 110 005 4010 15 10 005 185 005 4310 15 1300 005 3910 15 14 005 605 4610 15 17 005 Block, length 1705 1705 1905 005 1905 005 005 305 1905 605 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size EUME Air heater, c= 1 Capacity variant 3 4 5 EUME Air heater, c= Capacity variant 3 4 5 cc= 01 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 cc= 0 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 EUMK Air cooler, cc= 0 Capacity variant 1 3 4 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 5 10 5 10 10 15 15 35 0 45 5 30 40 55 10 5 35 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 15 5 10 10 0 15 5 5 35 40 55 70 15 35 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 0 5 15 0 30 15 40 5 55 40 70 90 0 65 30 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 5 10 0 30 10 0 30 45 10 35 0 40 70 95 0 65 31 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 10 0 30 10 0 35 45 5 30 10 45 60 85 115 5 60 80 3 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 15 0 35 15 30 35 55 5 35 15 55 60 80 110 140 35 80 110 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 10 15 35 10 15 5 55 0 35 10 55 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 40 41 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 0 35 15 30 40 55 5 5 5 45 60 75 105 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 5 45 0 40 45 70 5 30 5 75 95 135 175 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 30 75 0 45 55 75 10 35 5 55 85 100 160 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 30 0 45 65 85 15 30 0 90 110 160 10 35 80 110 45 95 10 110 1 115 155 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 0 35 60 5 70 100 0 30 5 105 135 195 45 65 135 185 53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 30 85 40 70 90 130 0 35 0 55 145 180 60 35 80 180

COMBINATION 087 Page 3 CENTRAL DUOVENT UNIT Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. B C 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUVB mixing section, the EUPA pleated filter, the EUME air heater for hot water in capacity variant 1, the EUMP air cooler for evaporative refrigerant in capacity variant 4, the EULB fan section and the DUOVENT EUMD air distribution section without smoke damper. C A ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor, air cooler including droplet eliminator. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 087 Page 33 CENTRAL DUOVENT UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 33 A B C (flange) Unit width Weight, kg Block 1, length 3005 15 380 3005 805 305 15 390 305 3105 15 475 3105 95 1105 3105 15 480 3105 3105 15 585 3105 1405 3410 15 635 1405 3410 15 630 15 1105 3610 15 655 15 3810 15 785 1605 1405 3910 15 810 1605 115 3610 15 95 15 1705 3910 15 960 15 3710 15 005 1070 1605 Block, length 005 1905 105 05 305 105 405 105 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 4010 15 945 1805 1405 4110 15 970 1805 4110 15 1105 1805 155 1705 4310 15 1195 1805 4010 15 180 1805 005 4410 15 1330 1805 4510 15 1360 005 1705 4610 15 1385 005 4610 15 155 005 185 005 4910 15 1605 005 4510 15 1835 005 605 510 15 15 005 05 305 305 5 05 605 5 605 605 905 5 305 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. Unit size EUME Air heater, c= 1 Capacity variant 3 4 5 EUME Air heater, c= Capacity variant 3 4 5 cc= 01 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 cc= 0 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 EUMK Air cooler, cc= 0 Capacity variant 1 3 4 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 EUMD DUOVENT Short Long Smoke Smoke damper damper c=1 4 c= 5 c=1 4 c= 5 d= 0,1 d= 0,1 d= d= 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 5 10 5 10 10 15 15 35 0 45 5 30 40 55 10 5 35 300 0 5 5 10 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 15 5 10 10 0 15 5 5 35 40 55 70 15 35 45 300 0 10 5 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 0 5 15 0 30 15 40 5 55 40 70 90 0 65 300 0 10 5 15 30 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 5 10 0 30 10 0 30 45 10 35 0 40 70 95 0 65 0 0 0 00 0 10 5 15 31 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 10 0 30 10 0 35 45 5 30 10 45 60 85 115 5 60 80 0 0 0 00 0 10 5 15 3 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 15 0 35 15 30 35 55 5 35 15 55 60 80 110 140 35 80 110 0 0 0 00 0 10 5 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 10 15 35 10 15 5 55 0 35 10 55 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 0 0 0 00 0 15 5 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 0 35 15 30 40 55 5 5 5 45 60 75 105 140 35 80 110 0 100 00 400 0 15 5 30 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 5 45 0 40 45 70 5 30 5 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 0 100 00 400 0 15 5 30 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 30 75 0 45 55 75 10 35 5 55 85 100 160 05 110 1 0 100 00 400 0 5 15 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 30 0 45 65 85 15 30 0 90 110 160 10 115 155 0 100 00 400 0 0 10 40 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 0 35 60 5 70 100 0 30 5 105 135 195 45 65 135 185 0 100 00 400 0 5 15 40 53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 30 85 40 70 90 130 0 35 0 55 145 180 60 35 80 180 0 100 00 400 0 30 15

COMBINATION 088 Page 34 CENTRAL REGOVENT UNIT Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. C B 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUVB mixing section, the EUPA pleated filter, the EUME air heater for hot water in capacity variant 1, the EUMP air cooler for evaporative refrigerant in capacity variant 4, the EULB fan section and the REGOVENT EUMR air distribution section without smoke damper. C A ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 088 CENTRAL REGOVENT UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 A B C (flange) Unit width Weight, kg Block 1, length 705 15 330 705 805 805 15 340 805 805 15 405 805 95 1105 805 15 415 805 805 15 490 805 1405 3005 15 5 3005 905 15 495 905 1105 3105 15 50 3105 3305 15 635 3305 1405 3510 115 15 660 1605 305 15 755 305 1705 3510 15 760 15 Block, length 1905 005 Page 35 C 609 33 3305 15 005 955 3305 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 3710 15 795 1805 1405 3810 15 80 1805 3810 155 15 90 1805 1705 4010 15 1010 1805 3710 15 1080 1805 005 4110 15 1130 1805 410 15 1140 005 1705 4310 15 1170 005 4310 185 15 190 005 005 4610 15 190 005 4310 15 1545 005 605 4910 15 1845 005 1905 005 005 05 1905 305 05 305 305 605 305 905 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size EUME Air heater, c= 1 Capacity variant 3 4 5 EUME Air heater, c= Capacity variant 3 4 5 cc= 01 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 cc= 0 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 EUMK Air cooler, cc= 0 Capacity variant 1 3 4 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 EUMR REGOVENT Smoke damper ø 160 ø 00 c = 0 c = 1 c = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 5 10 5 10 10 15 15 35 0 45 5 30 40 55 10 5 35 0 100 00 0 10 10 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 15 5 10 10 0 15 5 5 35 40 55 70 15 35 45 0 100 00 0 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 0 5 15 0 30 15 40 5 55 40 70 90 0 65 0 100 00 0 10 15 30 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 5 10 0 30 10 0 30 45 10 35 0 40 70 95 0 65 0 100 00 0 15 15 31 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 10 0 30 10 0 35 45 5 30 10 45 60 85 115 5 60 80 0 100 00 0 15 0 3 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 15 0 35 15 30 35 55 5 35 15 55 60 80 110 140 35 80 110 0 100 00 0 0 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 10 15 35 10 15 5 55 0 35 10 55 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 0 35 15 30 40 55 5 5 5 45 60 75 105 140 35 80 110 0 100 00 0 0 5 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 5 45 0 40 45 70 5 30 5 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 5 5 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 30 75 0 45 55 75 10 35 5 55 85 100 160 05 110 1 0 100 00 0 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 30 0 45 65 85 15 30 0 90 110 160 10 115 155 0 100 00 0 30 30 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 0 35 60 5 70 100 0 30 5 105 135 195 45 65 135 185 0 100 00 0 30 35 53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 30 85 40 70 90 130 0 35 0 55 145 180 60 35 80 180 0 100 00 0 40 40

COMBINATION 089 CENTRAL REGOTERM UNIT Page 36 Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. E 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination, on the supply air side, consists of the EUVA end connection frame, the EUPC bag filter, the EUMF rotary energy exchanger, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4 and the EULB fan section. On exhaust air side, this combination consists of the EUVA end connection frame, the EUPC bag filter and the EULB fan section. D ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor. C B A

COMBINATION 089 CENTRAL REGOTERM UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 A B C D E Rotor Unit width width Weight, kg 315 1 315 1405 695 805 3415 415 1405 715 3615 3 515 1405 790 95 1700 1105 3615 3 515 1405 800 3615 3 515 1605 955 1405 4015 5 715 1605 985 3615 3 515 1805 1065 1105 4015 5 715 1805 115 415 6 815 1805 115 1405 4415 7 915 1805 1410 15 300 4015 5 715 005 1435 1705 4615 8 3015 005 15 Page 37 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 4015 5 715 005 005 1660 4415 7 915 5 1580 1405 4615 8 3015 5 1700 4615 8 3015 5 1910 155 900 1705 15 10 315 5 010 4415 7 915 705 130 005 515 11 3315 705 5 15 10 315 3005 465 1705 515 11 3315 3005 575 515 11 3315 3005 730 185 30 005 5815 14 3615 3005 830 15 10 315 3305 970 605 6415 17 3915 3305 3560 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size 6 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 8 10 0 10 5 35 1 15 35 45 0 65 30 0 65 31 5 60 80 3 35 80 110 33 45 95 10 40 41 35 80 110 45 95 10 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 4 110 1 115 155 51 65 135 185 53 80 180

COMBINATION 090 CENTRAL REGOTERM UNIT Page 38 Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. D E C 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination, on the supply air side, consists of the EUVA end connection frame, the EUPC bag filter, the EUMF rotary energy exchanger, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4 the EUME air heater for hot water in capacity variant 1 and the EUL(B,F) fan section. On exhaust air side, this combination consists of the EUVA end connection frame, the EUPC bag filter and the EULB fan section. ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor, air cooler including droplet eliminator. B A

COMBINATION 090 CENTRAL REGOTERM UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 A B C D E Rotor Unit width width Weight, kg 3415 1 315 1405 715 805 3615 415 1405 735 3815 3 515 1405 815 95 1700 1105 3815 3 515 1405 85 3815 3 515 1605 990 1405 415 5 715 1605 100 3815 3 515 1805 10 1105 415 5 715 1805 1100 4415 6 815 1805 1 1405 4615 7 15 300 915 1805 130 415 5 715 005 1485 1705 4815 8 3015 005 1600 Page 39 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 4315 5 715 005 005 175 4715 7 915 5 1595 1405 4915 8 3015 5 1540 4915 8 3015 5 1975 155 900 1705 5315 10 315 5 075 4715 7 915 705 05 005 5515 11 3315 705 300 5315 10 315 3005 545 1705 5515 11 3315 3005 655 5515 11 3315 3005 80 185 30 005 6115 14 3615 3005 90 5315 10 315 3305 3075 605 670 17 3915 3305 3665 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size EUME Air heater, c = 1 Capacity variant 3 4 5 EUME Air heater, c = Capacity variant 3 4 5 cc= 01 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 cc= 0 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 EUMK Air cooler, cc = 0 Capacity variant 1 3 4 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 5 10 5 10 10 15 15 35 0 45 5 30 40 55 10 5 35 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 15 5 10 10 0 15 5 5 35 40 55 70 15 35 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 0 5 15 0 30 15 40 5 55 40 70 90 0 65 30 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 5 10 0 30 10 0 30 45 10 35 0 40 70 95 0 65 31 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 10 0 30 10 0 35 45 5 30 10 45 60 85 115 5 60 80 3 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 15 0 35 15 30 35 55 5 35 15 55 60 80 110 140 35 80 110 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 10 15 35 10 15 5 55 0 35 10 55 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 40 41 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 0 35 15 30 40 55 5 5 5 45 60 75 105 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 5 45 0 40 45 70 5 30 5 75 95 135 175 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 30 75 0 45 55 75 10 35 5 55 85 100 160 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 30 0 45 65 85 15 30 0 90 110 160 10 35 80 110 45 95 10 110 1 115 155 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 0 35 60 5 70 100 0 30 5 105 135 195 45 65 135 185 53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 30 85 40 70 90 130 0 35 0 55 145 180 60 35 80 180

COMBINATION 091 CENTRAL DUOVENT UNIT Page 40 C 609 Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. C B 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUVB mixing section, the EUPC bag filter, the EULB fan section, the EUTC empty section, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4 and the DUOVENT EUMD air distribution section without smoke damper. C A ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 091 CENTRAL DUOVENT UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 A B C Unit width (flange) Weight, kg Block 1, length Block, length Block 3, length 3710 15 405 105 105 805 3810 15 415 605 105 3810 15 0 605 105 95 1105 3810 15 5 605 105 3810 15 600 605 105 1405 4010 15 615 805 105 4010 15 600 705 1305 1105 410 15 6 905 1305 4515 15 785 1405 1805 1305 1405 4615 15 810 1405 1905 1305 15 4415 15 895 1305 1805 1305 1705 4615 15 930 1305 005 1305 Page 41 C 609 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 4415 15 005 1010 1305 1805 1305 4715 15 910 15 005 105 1405 4715 15 940 15 005 105 4915 155 15 1085 15 105 105 1705 15 15 1180 15 05 105 4815 15 180 15 005 105 005 515 15 1340 15 405 105 5315 15 1330 1705 305 105 1705 5415 15 1355 1705 305 105 5415 185 15 1515 1705 405 105 005 5715 15 1595 1705 705 105 5415 15 1830 1705 405 105 605 6015 15 140 1705 3006 105 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 EUMD DUOVENT Short Long Smoke Smoke damper damper c=1 4 c= 5 c=1 4 c= 5 d= 0,1 d= 0,1 d= d= 0 10 5 35 300 0 5 5 10 1 15 35 45 300 0 10 5 15 0 65 300 0 10 5 15 30 0 65 0 0 0 00 0 10 5 15 31 5 60 80 0 0 0 00 0 10 5 15 3 35 80 110 0 0 0 00 0 10 5 0 33 45 95 10 0 0 0 00 0 15 5 0 40 41 35 80 110 45 95 10 0 100 00 400 0 15 5 30 0 100 00 400 0 15 5 30 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 4 110 1 0 100 00 400 0 5 15 45 115 155 0 100 00 400 0 0 10 40 51 65 135 185 0 100 00 400 0 5 15 40 53 80 180 0 100 00 400 0 30 15

COMBINATION 09 CENTRAL REGOVENT UNIT Page 4 C 609 Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. C B 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUVB mixing section, the EUPC bag filter, the EULB fan section, the EULB fan section, the EUTC empty section, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4, the EUME air heater for hot water in capacity variant 1 and the REGOVENT EUMR air distribution section without smoke damper. C A ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 09 CENTRAL REGOVENT UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 A B C (flange) Unit width Weight, kg Block 1, length Block, length Block 3, length 3610 15 385 5 1105 805 3710 15 400 605 1105 3710 95 15 475 605 1105 1105 3710 15 480 605 1105 3710 15 570 605 1105 1405 3910 15 585 805 1105 3810 15 570 705 1105 1105 4010 15 595 905 1105 410 15 730 3105 1105 1405 4310 15 15 755 305 1105 410 15 85 3005 105 1705 4410 15 860 305 105 Page 43 C 609 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 410 15 005 960 3005 105 4715 15 890 15 005 105 1405 4715 15 915 15 005 105 4815 155 15 1030 15 105 105 1705 4915 15 110 15 05 105 4715 15 100 15 005 105 005 5115 15 1195 15 405 105 515 15 170 1705 305 105 1705 5315 15 195 1705 405 105 5315 185 15 140 1705 405 105 005 5615 15 10 1705 705 105 5315 15 1700 1705 405 105 605 5915 15 010 1705 3005 105 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size EUME Air heater, c= 1 Capacity variant 3 4 5 EUME Air heater, c= Capacity variant 3 4 5 cc= 01 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 cc= 0 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 EUMK Air cooler, cc= 0 Capacity variant 1 3 4 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 EUMR REGOVENT Smoke damper ø 160 ø 00 c = 0 c = 1 c = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 5 10 5 10 10 15 15 35 0 45 5 30 40 55 10 5 35 0 100 00 0 10 10 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 15 5 10 10 0 15 5 5 35 40 55 70 15 35 45 0 100 00 0 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 0 5 15 0 30 15 40 5 55 40 70 90 0 65 0 100 00 0 10 15 30 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 5 10 0 30 10 0 30 45 10 35 0 40 70 95 0 65 0 100 00 0 15 15 31 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 10 0 30 10 0 35 45 5 30 10 45 60 85 115 5 60 80 0 100 00 0 15 0 3 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 15 0 35 15 30 35 55 5 35 15 55 60 80 110 140 35 80 110 0 100 00 0 0 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 10 15 35 10 15 5 55 0 35 10 55 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 0 35 15 30 40 55 5 5 5 45 60 75 105 140 35 80 110 0 100 00 0 0 5 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 5 45 0 40 45 70 5 30 5 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 5 5 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 30 75 0 45 55 75 10 35 5 55 85 100 160 05 110 1 0 100 00 0 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 30 0 45 65 85 15 30 0 90 110 160 10 115 155 0 100 00 0 30 30 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 0 35 60 5 70 100 0 30 5 105 135 195 45 65 135 185 0 100 00 0 30 35 53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 30 85 40 70 90 130 0 35 0 55 145 180 60 35 80 180 0 100 00 0 40 40

COMBINATION 093 CENTRAL REGOVENT UNIT Page 44 C 609 Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. C B 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination consists of the EUVB mixing section, the EUPC bag filter, the EULB fan section, the EULB fan section, the EUTC empty section, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4 and the REGOVENT EUMR air distribution section without smoke damper. C A ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motor. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks, will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm.

COMBINATION 093 CENTRAL REGOVENT UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 A B C (flange) Unit width Weight, kg Block 1, length Block, length Block 3, length 3305 15 3 3305 805 3405 15 360 3405 3405 430 3405 95 15 1105 3405 15 435 3405 3405 15 515 3405 1405 3710 15 555 805 905 3610 15 535 705 905 1105 3810 15 560 905 905 4010 15 685 3105 905 1405 4110 710 303 905 15 15 3910 15 775 3005 905 1705 4110 15 810 305 905 Page 45 C 609 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 3910 15 005 90 3005 905 4415 15 830 15 005 905 1405 4415 15 860 15 005 905 4515 965 15 105 905 155 15 1705 4615 15 1055 15 05 905 4415 15 115 15 005 905 005 4815 15 1180 15 405 905 4915 15 1185 1705 305 905 1705 15 15 115 1705 405 905 15 1330 1705 405 905 185 15 005 5315 15 1410 1705 705 905 15 15 1595 1705 405 905 605 5615 15 1910 1705 3005 905 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size 6 d=1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 8 10 EUMR REGOVENT Smoke damper ø 160 ø 00 c = 0 c = 1 c = 0 10 5 35 0 100 00 0 10 10 1 15 35 45 0 100 00 0 10 10 0 65 0 100 00 0 10 15 30 0 65 0 100 00 0 15 15 31 5 60 80 0 100 00 0 15 0 3 35 80 110 0 100 00 0 0 0 33 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 0 0 40 41 35 80 110 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 0 5 0 100 00 0 5 5 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 4 110 1 0 100 00 0 5 5 115 155 0 100 00 0 30 30 51 65 135 185 0 100 00 0 30 35 53 80 180 0 100 00 0 40 40

COMBINATION 094 CENTRAL REGOVENT/REGOTERM UNIT Page 46 C 609 Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. D C E 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination, on supply air side, consists of the EUVA end connection frame, the EUPC bag filter, the EUMF rotary energy exchanger, the EULB fan section, the EULB fan section, the EUTC empty section, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4, the EUME air heater for hot water in capacity variant 1 and the REGOVENT EUMR air distribution section. On exhaust air side, this combination consists of the EUMO exhaust air section without smoke damper, the EUPC bag filter and the EULB fan section. ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motors. B A

COMBINATION 094 CENTRAL REGOVENT/REGOTERM UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm. Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 A B C D E Rotor Unit width width Weight, kg 3815 1 715 1405 875 805 4015 815 1405 895 415 3 915 1405 890 95 1700 1105 415 3 915 1405 800 415 3 915 1605 1080 1405 4615 5 3115 1605 1100 415 3 915 1805 1145 1105 4615 5 3115 1805 1195 4815 6 315 1805 1360 1405 15 7 3315 1805 1405 15 300 4715 5 3115 005 1535 1705 515 8 3415 005 1605 Page 47 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 4715 5 3115 005 005 1780 515 7 3315 3 175 1405 5315 8 3415 5 1875 5415 8 3415 5 1945 155 900 1705 5815 10 3615 5 15 515 7 3315 705 60 005 610 11 3715 705 365 590 10 3615 3005 655 1705 610 11 3715 3005 710 610 11 3715 3005 855 185 30 005 670 14 4015 3005 915 610 10 3615 3305 3300 605 730 17 4315 3305 3900 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size EUME Air heater, c = 1 Capacity variant 3 4 5 EUME Air heater, c = Capacity variant 3 4 5 cc = 01 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 cc = 0 EUES Air heater, Capacity variant 1 EUMK Air cooler, cc = 0 Capacity variant 1 3 4 d = 1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 EUMR REGOVENT Smoke damper ø 160 ø 00 c = 0 c = 1 c = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 5 10 5 10 10 15 15 35 0 45 5 30 40 55 10 5 35 0 100 00 0 10 10 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 15 5 10 10 0 15 5 5 35 40 55 70 15 35 45 0 100 00 0 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 400 0 5 10 0 5 15 0 30 15 40 5 55 40 70 90 0 65 0 100 00 0 10 15 30 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 5 10 0 30 10 0 30 45 10 35 0 40 70 95 0 65 0 100 00 0 15 15 31 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 10 0 30 10 0 35 45 5 30 10 45 60 85 115 5 60 80 0 100 00 0 15 0 3 0 0 0 100 0 100 00 00 00 400 0 15 0 35 15 30 35 55 5 35 15 55 60 80 110 140 35 80 110 0 100 00 0 0 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 10 15 35 10 15 5 55 0 35 10 55 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 0 35 15 30 40 55 5 5 5 45 60 75 105 140 35 80 110 0 100 00 0 0 5 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 5 45 0 40 45 70 5 30 5 75 95 135 175 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 5 5 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 0 30 75 0 45 55 75 10 35 5 55 85 100 160 05 110 1 0 100 00 0 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 15 30 0 45 65 85 15 30 0 90 110 160 10 115 155 0 100 00 0 30 30 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 0 0 35 60 5 70 100 0 30 5 105 135 195 45 65 135 185 0 100 00 0 30 35 53 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 10 100 100 300 5 30 85 40 70 90 130 0 35 0 55 145 180 60 35 80 180 0 100 00 0 40 40

COMBINATION 095 CENTRAL REGOVENT/REGOTERM UNIT Page 48 C 609 Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. D C E 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination, on supply air side, consists of the EUVA end connection frame, the EUPC bag filter, the EUMF rotary energy exchanger, the EULB fan section, the EULB fan section, the EUTC empty section, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4 and the REGOVENT EUMR air distribution section. On exhaust air side, this combination consists of the EUMO exhaust air section without smoke damper, the EUPC bag filter and the EULB fan section. ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including base frame, belt drive, excluding motors. B A

COMBINATION 095 CENTRAL REGOVENT/REGOTERM UNIT Dimensions and s, all dimensions in mm Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 A B C D E Rotor Unit width width Weight, kg 3615 1 715 1405 755 805 3815 815 1405 775 4015 3 915 1405 865 95 1700 1105 4015 3 915 1405 875 4015 3 915 1605 1040 1405 4415 5 3115 1605 1075 4015 3 915 1805 1170 1105 4415 5 3115 1805 1160 4615 6 315 1805 1315 1405 4815 7 3315 1805 1385 15 300 4515 5 3115 005 1515 1705 15 8 3415 005 1610 Page 49 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 4515 5 3115 005 005 1755 4915 7 3315 5 1665 1405 15 8 3415 5 1715 5115 8 3415 5 190 155 900 1705 5415 10 3615 5 105 4915 7 3315 705 5 005 5715 11 3715 705 375 5515 10 3615 3005 575 1705 5715 11 3715 3005 65 580 11 3715 3005 765 185 30 005 640 14 4015 3005 95 580 10 3615 3305 3195 605 710 17 4315 3305 3795 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size 6 d = 1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 8 10 EUMR REGOVENT Smoke damper ø 160 ø 00 c = 0 c = 1 c = 0 10 5 35 0 100 00 0 10 10 1 15 35 45 0 100 00 0 10 10 0 65 0 100 00 0 10 15 30 0 65 0 100 00 0 15 15 31 5 60 80 0 100 00 0 15 0 3 35 80 110 0 100 00 0 0 0 33 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 0 0 40 41 35 80 110 45 95 10 0 100 00 0 0 5 0 100 00 0 5 5 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively. 4 110 1 0 100 00 0 5 5 115 155 0 100 00 0 30 30 51 65 135 185 0 100 00 0 30 35 53 80 180 0 100 00 0 40 40

COMBINATION 096 CENTRAL DUOVENT/REGOTERM UNIT Page C 609 Air flow, m 3 /h 1 000 000 5 000 10 000 0 000 000 Filter 0 1 40 30 41 31 3 33 51 4 53 Air Cooler 0 40 1 30 31 3 41 33 4 51 5 0. 0.3 0.4 0.5 1 3 4 5 10 0 Air flow, m 3 /s The line-shaded area indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. Use air cooler with droplet eliminator. 3 3' 4 4' 0 Air flow range Normal face area Max face area (') Outlet air velocity across the face surface of the air cooler, in m/s. D E 1) Length A refers to the shortest possible combination. This combination, on supply air side, consists of the EUVA end connection frame, the EUPB bag filter, the EUMF rotary energy exchanger, the EULB fan section, the EUMF empty section, the EUMN air cooler for chilled water in capacity variant 4, and the DUOVENT EUMD air distribution section. On exhaust air side, this combination consists of the EUMD exhaust air section without smoke damper, the EUPB bag filter and the EULB fan section. C ) Weight, kg, of unit combination including belt drive, excluding motors. 3) If the additional length exceeds max. block length 3305 mm of any block, a joint between blocks will increase the total length of the unit by 104 mm. B A

COMBINATION 096 CENTRAL DUOVENT/REGOTERM UNIT Page 51 Unit size and fan size 0 0 3 1 1 3 3 30 30 3 31 31 3 3 s 3 3 33 40 40 3 41 41 3 4 s 4 3 3 51 51 3 53 s 53 3 A B C D E Rotor Unit width width Weight, kg 3915 1 715 1405 790 805 4115 815 1405 810 4315 3 915 1405 915 95 1700 1105 4315 3 915 1405 95 4315 3 915 1605 1110 1405 4715 5 3115 1605 1140 4415 3 915 1805 1170 1105 4815 5 3115 1805 10 15 6 315 1805 1385 1405 515 7 3315 1805 1435 15 300 4915 5 3115 005 1575 1705 5415 8 3415 005 1645 4915 5 3115 005 005 185 5315 7 3315 5 17 1405 5415 8 3415 5 1800 550 8 3415 5 005 155 900 1705 580 10 3615 5 185 50 7 3315 705 345 005 610 11 3715 705 4 590 10 3615 3005 70 1705 630 11 3715 3005 770 610 11 3715 3005 9 185 30 005 670 14 4015 3005 3100 600 10 3615 3305 3440 605 730 17 4315 3305 4040 Additional lengths and s 4) for other air heaters, air coolers and capacities. Unit size 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 d = 1 EUM(N,P) Air cooler, Capacity variant 6 8 10 10 5 35 15 35 45 0 65 0 65 5 60 80 35 80 110 45 95 10 35 80 110 45 95 10 110 1 115 155 65 135 185 80 180 EUMD DUOVENT Short Long Smoke Smoke damper damper c=1 4 c = 5 c=1 4 c = 5 d= 0,1 d = 0,1 d = d = 300 0 5 5 10 300 0 10 5 15 300 0 10 5 15 0 0 0 00 0 10 5 15 0 0 0 00 0 10 5 15 0 0 0 00 0 10 5 0 0 0 0 00 0 15 5 0 0 100 00 400 0 15 5 30 0 100 00 400 0 15 5 30 0 100 00 400 0 5 15 45 0 100 00 400 0 0 10 40 0 100 00 400 0 5 15 40 0 100 00 400 0 30 15 4) The additional lengths and s tabulated are to be added to ( subtracted from) length A and the respectively.

SPECIAL ORDER Page 5 Air conditioning units consisting of unit sections selected to suit the system The standardised unit combinations may obviously be unsuitable for certain installations. The unit may have to be modified to meet special demands e.g. a bag filter replaced by a pleated filter, or several filters installed in series. For such situations, use the main dimensions of the individual unit sections listed on pages 6 10 to calculate the overall dimensions of the unit. For particulars of duct connection dimensions, see page 10. Example Given: Marine version of supply air unit with galvanized casing. The unit is to be delivered in two sections (blocks), each mounted on its own base frame. The unit sections included in each block are shown in the figures below. Supply air flow q = 3,1 m3/s (11160 m 3 /h). Unit 1 Width, Height, Weight, mm mm ) mm kg 1 Unit casing EUMA-31-90-1-1-1-1 1404 1074 104 1) 8 complete with: (component unit sections and accessories viewed in the direction of air flow) EUVC mixing section, 1404 1074 L 1 600 90 installation alternative 0 EUPB bag filter, class EU 5 (F 45) 1404 1074 L 400 55 EUQA humidifier, 90% humidification rate 1404 1074 L 3 900 10 EUMN air cooler for chilled water, with droplet eliminator capacity variant 08 and full size face area (Cu/Al) 1554 1074 L 4 600 05 EUTC (b = 3) empty section with inspection panel 1404 1074 L 5 300 5 EUAZ-04-31-90-1-1-1 base frame 1 70 Total length and 904 593 Solution: Select the unit size from the survey chart for each unit combination. Check that all unit sections are suitable for the air flow. For this particular air flow, select size 31. The main dimensions of the individual unit sections are given on pages 6 10. Unit Width, Height, Weight, mm mm ) mm kg 1 Unit casing EUMA-31-00-1-1-1-1 1404 1074 104 1) 8 EUME air heater for hot water, capacity variant (Cu/Al) 1404 1074 L 6 00 45 EULB-31- fan section with impeller with backward-curved blades 1404 1074 L 7 1400 00 EUMR air distribution section REGOVENT without smoke damper 1404 1074 L 8 300 47 EUAZ-04-31-00-1-1-1 base frame 1 55 Total length and 004 375 1) For each block, add 5 mm to the length at each end. Total length = 904 + 004 = 4908 mm (excl. damper). ) Total height with base frame = 1074 + 1 = 14 mm. All lengths are the overall lengths of the unit sections. 15 1074 134 1 15 5 L 1 L L 3 L 4 L 5 Total length of unit 1 5 5 L 6 L 7 L 8 Total length of unit 5

Page 53 CONTENTS D 910 Page Casing...54 EUVA End connection frame...56 EUVB Connecion section...58 EUVC Mixing section...60 EUVD Mixing and exhaust section...6 EUVE Intake / Exhaust section...64 EUPA Pleated filter...66 EUPB Short bag filter...67 EUPC Long bag filter...68 EUPD Filter / Coalescor...69 EUME Air heater for hot water...71 EUES Air heater for steam...75 EUMK Air heater electric...78 EUML Electric air heater...81 EUMN Air cooler for chilled water...84 EUMP Air cooler for evaporative refrigerant...87 EUQA Humidifier...90 EUMQ Steam humidifier...91 EUMQ Spray humidifier...9 EUTC Empty section...9 EUL(B,F) Centrifugal fan...95 EUL(T,V) Belt drive...99 APAM, ATAM, ARAM Motor...99 REGOTERM EUMF Energy recovery unit...100 DUOVENT EUMD Air distribution section...104 REGOVENT EUMR Air distribution section...109 EUMO Exhaust air section...11 EUVH Jointing frame...114 Accessories...116

EUMM Air conditioning unit Page 54 DESCRIPTION C 609 Design The inspection side of the various unit sections may be on the right-hand or left-hand side, viewed in the direction of air flow. In a given unit, the inspection or connection sides of the individual unit functions may be either on the left-hand side or on the righthand side. A unit section of one size can be connected by means of a jointing frame to a unit section of the next larger or smaller size. Materials Unless otherwise stated, the components are made of galvanized or stainless sheet steel (AISI 304). As an option, every unit section can be delivered made of stainless sheet steel (AISI 316). Get in touch with Fläkt Woods for further details. Casing Each wall of the casing consists of a mm thick mineral wool panel sandwiched between two sheet steel panels. The insulation material has been granted type approval and provides good thermal insulation. Its coefficient of heat transmission k is 1. W/(m C), and the material also offers good sound attenuation and fire resistance. The casing is very sturdy and, in its standard design, can withstand an internal pressure or vacuum of up to 0 Pa pressure differential. The maximum permissible air temperatures is +70 C. Quotations for casings suitable for higher temperatures can be submitted on request. Effective sealing strips are supplied for every joint. Moreover, all bottom panels are sealed and the casing is completely smooth on the inside and outside, which makes the unit hygienic and easy to clean. Two units of the same width can be stacked on top of one another.

Page 55 UNIT CASING Dimensions and s C 609 5 5 A-104 A A B-104 B 5 5 A L Size A B Weight, kg 1) 0 804 774 18 1 1104 774 1 1404 774 5 30 1104 1074 5 31 1404 1074 8 3 1704 1074 31 33 004 1074 34 40 1404 1374 31 41 1704 1374 34 4 004 1374 37 1704 1674 37 51 004 1674 40 53 604 1674 46 Possible unit lengths, L 300 1300 300 3300 400 1400 400 0 10 0 600 1600 600 700 1700 700 800 1800 800 900 1900 900 1000 000 3000 1100 100 3100 100 00 300 Actual length = L + 4 mm 1) Additional for the casing (TWO END FRAMES AND 8 CORNER PIECES) 17 35 17 1.5 mm 0

EUVA END CONNECTION FRAME Page 56 C 609 With damper Design The connection frame consists of an insulated, doubleskin wall, with an opening for duct connection. A version with the damper fitted is available. The damper blades, which are contra-rotating, are of double-skin design. The bearings are of acetate plastic. The damper must be installed with the shafts horizontal. The damper casing is made of single-skin sheet steel. As option, the damper can be delivered made of stainless sheet steel. The maximum permissible pressure differential when the damper is closed is 1000 Pa. Torque (max. torque, Nm, at a static pressure differential of 400 Pa) Accessories With frame Size 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 Max. torque 5 6 6 6 7 8 9 8 9 9 9 10 13 EUAZ-11-10 installation of damper motor The damper motor is delivered by Fläkt Woods. One damper motor is required. EUVZ-01 lever actuator The lever actuator is intended for manual control of the damper, mounted on service side. EUVZ-0 flexible connection EUVZ-03 duct connection piece EUVZ-04 counterflange EUVZ-05 protective screen EUAZ-3 earthing cable (flexible connection) Connection wall Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Specification Variant (b) 0 = without damper = with damper type 4, galvanized CEN 3 5 = with damper type 4, CEN 3 stainless steel 333 (AISI 304) 7 = without opening 8 = with damper stainless steel 343 (AISI 316) OFF-SHORE Connection (c) 0 = when (b = 0, 7) 1 = PG-joint (b =, 5) = Flange (b =, 5, 8) EUVA-aa-b-c-d-e Panel material (d) 1 = 0.7 mm thick galv. sheet steel = 1.0 mm thick galv. sheet steel 5 = 0.7 mm thick stainless steel 333 (AISI 304) 7 = 0.7 mm thick stainless steel 343 (AISI 316) frame 333 (AISI 304) 8 = 1 mm thick stainless steel 343 (AISI 316) frame 333 (AISI 304) OFF-SHORE Location (e) 0 = inlet end wall on blocks 1 4 = location on EUMF 1) 9 = outlet end wall on blocks 1) Seen from inspection side. 0,, 5, 5 8 e = e = 4 e = e = e = 1 e = 3 EUMF 7

EUVA END CONNECTION FRAME Page 57 Dimensions and s G C D F F E 5 5 5 b = 0 b =, 5, 8 b = 7 b = 8 Size C D E F G 1) Weight, kg Weight, kg Weight, kg Weight, kg b = 0 b =, 5, 8 b = 7 b = 8 0 15 0 137 0 15 5 15 10 5 1 15 800 137 0 15 5 0 10 30 15 1100 137 0 15 5 5 15 35 30 15 800 137 800 15 10 30 15 40 31 15 1100 137 800 15 10 35 0 45 3 15 1400 137 800 15 10 40 5 33 15 1700 137 800 15 15 30 65 40 15 1100 187 1000 15 10 45 5 60 41 15 1400 187 1000 15 15 30 65 4 15 1700 187 1000 15 15 60 40 75 15 1400 37 100 15 0 60 40 75 51 15 1700 37 100 15 0 70 45 85 53 30 000 137 1400 15 5 90 60 105 1) Shown for flange connection. For PG connection + 5 mm.

EUVB CONNECTION SECTION Page 58 C 609 Design The connection section for inlet or outlet end of the air handling unit consists of a empty section with one internal damper on end wall or bottom. Alternatively one internal/external damper on top. The damper blades, which are contra-rotating, are of double-skin design. The bearings are of acetate plastic. The damper must be installed with the shafts horizontal. The damper casing is made of single-skin sheet steel. As option, the section can be delivered without damper or with a damper, made of stainless sheet steel. The maximum permissible pressure differential when the damper is closed is 1000 Pa. Connection section (one damper) Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 1) 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Installation alternative (b) Specification 1 3 4 5 EUVB-aa-b-c-d-e-f Torque (max. torque, Nm, at a static pressure differential of 400 Pa). Size 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 Max. torque 5 6 6 6 7 8 9 8 9 9 9 10 13 Accessories EUAZ-11-10 installation of damper actuator. The damper motor is delivered by Fläkt Woods. One damper motor is required. EUVZ-01 lever actuator The lever actuator is intended for manual control of the damper, mounted on service side. EUVZ-0 flexible connection EUVZ-03 duct connection piece EUVZ-04 counterflange EUVZ-05 protective screen EUAZ-01-1 inspection window (function length 300) EUAZ-3 earthing cable (flexible connection) Damper type (c) 0 = without damper (b = 3 5; d = 0) = with damper type 4, galvanized CEN 3 3 = with damper type 5, galvanized CEN 4 5 = with damper type 4, stainless steel 333 (AISI 304) CEN 3 6 = with damper type 5, stainless steel 333 (AISI 304) CEN 4) 8 = with pressure release damper type 5, CEN 4 stainless steel 343 (AISI 316) OFF-SHORE (b = 1, ) 9 = with Back-Flow damper, stainless steel 343 (AISI 316) OFF-SHORE (b = 1, ) Connection (d) 0 = without damper (c = 0) 1 = PG-joint (b = 3) = flange connection Location (e) 1 = inlet end (b = 1, 3 5) = outlet end (b = 1, 3 5) 3 = free position (b = ) Inspection side (f) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Size 33 for c = 0,, 3, 5, 6.

EUVB CONNECTION SECTION Page 59 C 609 Dimensions and s C D F E 5 L 1 L 1 b = 1 b = 10 G C D H 5 L b = 3 5 Size C D E F G H 1) Weight Weight Weight L 1 L b = 1 b = b = 3 5 0 15 0 137 0 400 15 00 0 5 0 40 1 15 800 137 0 300 15 00 400 30 5 45 15 1100 137 0 300 15 00 400 40 30 30 15 800 137 800 400 15 300 0 40 60 31 15 1100 137 800 0 15 300 600 60 80 3 15 1400 137 800 400 15 300 0 70 60 80 33 15 1700 137 800 400 15 300 0 80 65 90 40 15 1100 187 1000 600 15 300 700 70 55 100 41 15 1400 187 1000 600 15 300 700 80 65 115 4 15 1700 187 1000 600 15 300 700 90 75 130 15 1400 37 100 800 15 300 900 90 75 1 51 15 1700 37 100 800 15 300 900 105 85 170 53 30 000 137 1400 800 15 300 900 10 105 00 1) Shown for flange connection. For PG connection + 5 mm.

Page 60 EUVC MIXING SECTION B-604 Accessories Design Casing with two dampers for mixing the recirculated exhaust air and the outdoor air. The damper blades, which are contra-rotating, are of double-skin design. The bearings are of acetate plastic. The dampers are individually adjustable, to allow for presetting the required mixing ratio. To simplify adjustment, the dampers up to size are interconnected by means of a connecting rod on the outside of the casing. The damper arrangement provides excellent mixing of the warm and cold air. The variation in temperature over the cross-sectional area of the unit after the mixing section is less than 15% of the temperature difference between the two air streams. As an option, the mixing section can be delivered without dampers. EUAZ-11-10 installation of actuator The damper motor is delivered by Fläkt Woods. One or two actuators are required. EUVZ-01 lever actuator The lever actuator is intended for manual control of the damper, mounted on service side. EUVZ-0 flexible connection EUVZ-03 duct connection piece EUVZ-04 counterflange EUVZ-05 protective screen EUAZ-01-1 inspection window EUAZ-3 earthing cable (flexible connection) Mixing section (two dampers) Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Installation alternative (bb) Specification 01 0 03 04 EUVC-aa-bb-c-d-e-f Example Exhaust air temperature + C Outdoor air temperature C Maximum temperature variation over the cross-sectional area of the unit: 0.15 4 = 3.6 C. 1 13 14 Torque (max. torque, Nm, at a static pressure differential of 400 Pa). Size 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 Max. torque 9 9 11 9 11 11 1 13 13 13 15 9 9 Number of ac- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 tuators Damper type (c) 0 = without damper (d = 0) = with type 4, galvanized CEN 3 5 = with type 4, stainless CEN 3 Connection (d) 0 = without damper (c = 0) 1 = PG-joint (bb = 01 04) = flange connection (bb = 01 14) Location (e) 1 = inlet end = outlet end Inspection side (f) 1 = right-hand = left-hand

Page 61 EUVC MIXING SECTION C 609 Dimensions and s N 10 E *) E 10 E 87 87 F 87 M E E 100 M F E O 87 5 L 1 5 L 1 5 L 1 5 3 L 3 1 5 L 1 bb = 01 bb = 0, 03, 04 (external dampers) bb = 1 (internal dampers) bb = 13 (internal dampers) bb = 14 (internal dampers) C D Size C D E F 1) M N O L 1 Weight Weight bb = 01 bb = 0 14 0 15 0 400 15 00 15 187 0 40 45 1 15 800 300 15 00 15 187 400 45 15 1100 300 15 00 15 187 400 55 60 30 15 800 400 15 400 15 87 0 65 65 31 15 1100 0 15 400 15 87 600 85 90 3 15 1400 400 15 400 15 87 0 95 95 33 15 1700 400 15 400 15 87 0 115 115 40 15 1100 600 15 400 15 387 700 105 115 41 15 1400 600 15 400 15 387 700 15 130 4 15 1700 600 15 400 15 387 700 140 1 15 1400 800 15 600 15 87 900 165 170 51 15 1700 800 15 600 15 87 900 185 190 53 30 000 800 15 600 15 87 900 15 5 1) Shown for flange connection. For PG connection + 5 mm.

EUVD MIXING AND EXHAUST SECTION Page 6 C 609 Design The mixing and exhaust section is used for mixing the recirculated air from separate supply and exhaust air units. The damper blades, which are contra-rotating, are of double-skin design. The bearings are of acetate plastic. The air dampers are connected in parallel, whereas the recirculated air damper is connected for reverse action. The air velocity across the face area of the dampers at maximum air flow rate is approx, 10 m/s. As an option, the section can be delivered without supply/exhaust dampers and steel sheet wall. Torque (max. torque, Nm, at a static pressure differential of 400 Pa). Size 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 Max. torque bb = 0 5 5 6 5 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 9 9 bb = 03 13 13 15 13 15 15 15 13 14 15 15 ( 9) ( 9) Accessories EUAZ-11-10 installation of actuator The damper motor is delivered by Fläkt Woods. One or two actuators are required. EUVZ-01 lever actuator The lever actuator is intended for manual control of the damper, mounted on service side. EUVZ-0 flexible connection EUVZ-03 duct connection piece EUVZ-04 counterflange EUVZ-05 protective screen EUAZ-01-1 inspection window EUAZ-3 earthing cable (flexible connection) Specification Mixing and exhaust section (three dampers) Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Installation alternative (bb) 0 03 Damper type (c) 0 = without supply/exhaust air damper and wall (d = 0) = with damper type 4, galvanized CEN 3 5 = with damper type 4, stainless CEN 3 Connection type (d) 0 = without damper (c = 0) = flange Location (e) 1 = inlet = outlet Inspection side (f) 1 = right-hand = left-hand EUVD-aa-bb-c-d-e-f

EUVD MIXING AND EXHAUST SECTION Page 63 C 609 Dimensions and s C D L 1 bb = 0 E 87 L C D bb = 03 Size C D E F 1) L Weight Weight bb = 0 bb = 03 0 15 0 400 15 0 30 40 1 15 800 300 15 400 35 40 15 1100 300 15 400 35 30 15 800 400 15 0 45 55 31 15 1100 0 15 600 60 75 3 15 1400 400 15 0 55 80 33 15 1700 400 15 0 60 95 40 15 1100 600 15 700 75 95 41 15 1400 600 15 700 85 110 4 15 1700 600 15 700 90 15 15 1400 800 15 900 110 145 51 15 1700 800 15 900 15 160 53 30 000 800 15 900 175 185 1) Shown for flange connection. For PG connection + 5 mm.

EUVE INTAKE / EXHAUST SECTION Page 64 C 609 Design Unit section and equipped with exhaust air dampers exhaust air louvre grille. A grille consisting of vertical labyrinth-shaped vanes can be installed for the outdoor air and exhaust air dampers for separating raindrops. The grille can also be supplied with horizontal aluminium vanes. The mixing section is always equipped with an inspection door. An exhaust air louvre grille can also be installed for the exhaust air damper. The exhaust louvre grille is made of glass-fibre reinforced plastic fabric. The air velocity across the face area of the damper at maximum air flow rate is approx. 5 m/s. Intake/exhaust section (with door) Unit size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Installation alternative (b) Specification EUVE-aa-1-c--e 1 Damper type (c) 0 = without damper 5 = with stainless steel, type 4 CEN 3 damper 6 = with stainless steel, type 5 CEN 4 damper Material (d) = stainless sheet steel Inspection side (e) 1 = right-hand = left-hand

Page 65 EUVE INTAKE / EXHAUST SECTION Dimensions and s 1 J H 5 300 K N b = 1 Size N K H J Weight, kg 0 0 0 400 187 40 1 0 800 600 87 45 0 1100 600 87 60 30 0 800 800 137 65 31 0 1100 800 137 75 3 0 1400 800 137 85 40 0 1100 100 87 85 41 0 1400 100 87 105 4 0 1700 100 87 115 0 1400 1400 137 115 51 0 1700 1400 137 135 53 30 000 1400 137 1

EUPA PLEATED FILTER Page 66 Specification Filter, pleated EUPA-aa-b-c-d Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Design The filter consists of one or more cassettes with pleated filter mats. Filter classes as per EUROVENT 4/5 and as per ASHRAE standard 5 76 (SMS 89). EUROVENT Filter Cleanable Disposable Material 4/5 class type type EU 3 G 85 EU 3 G 85 1) As per DIN 53438, section 3, class F1. All filter materials can be used at temperatures up to 100 C ). The filter mats are easy to replace. The cassettes are mounted on guide rails and are thus easy to withdraw and insert. Each cassette is fitted with a sealing strip. The filter section can be ordered with guide rails and filter frames in galvanized or stainless sheet steel. The outside of the casing is provided with tappings for connection to a manometer or a filter monitor. ) The casing is designed for max. 70 C. Accessories EUPZ-07 manometer Used for measuring the pressure drop across the filter. Pressure range: 0 400 Pa. EUPZ-08 filter monitor Provides remote indication when the pressure drop across the filter has exceeded the preset value ( Pa). Mounting kit and connection components are supplied. Replacement filter media Flame-resistant polyester 1) Flame-resistant polyester 1) EUPZ-01 filter cassette with filter mat. EUPZ-0 filter mat Class EU 3 (G 85) disposable or EU 3 (G 85) cleanable replacement mat. The mats are delivered cut to size, in sets for the appropriate unit sizes. Filter type (b) 0 = without filter = filter class EU 3 (G 85), synthetic, cleanable 3 = filter class EU 3 (G 85), synthetic, disposable Material (c) 1 = galvanized steel = stainless steel Inspection side (d) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Replacement filters Filter cassette, for EUPA, set Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 EUPZ-01-bb-c-d Filter type (c) = filter class EU 3 (G 85), synthetic, cleanable 3 = filter class EU 3 (G 85), synthetic, disposable Material (d) 1 = galvanized steel = stainless steel Filter mat. for EUPA, set Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 EUPZ-0-bb-c Filter type (c) = filter class EU 3 (G 85), synthetic, cleanable 3 = filter class EU 3 (G 85), synthetic, disposable

EUPB SHORT BAG FILTER Page 67 Specification Short bag filter EUPB-aa-bb-c-1-e-f Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Design The filter consists of one or more disposable filter elements, with deep-folded basic or fine filter media. Filter classes as per EUROVENT 4/5 and as per ASHRAE Standard 5 76 (SMS 89). EUROVENT 4/5 Filter class Material 1) EU 3 G 85 Flame-resistant polyester EU 4 G 90 Flame-resistant polyester EU 5 F 45 Flame-resistant polyester 1) As per DIN 53438, section 3, class F1. The flame-resistant polyester filter material can be used at temperatures up to 100 C ). The filter elements are replaceable. They are mounted on guide rails, and can therefore be easily withdrawn and inserted. The filter section can be ordered with internal components and guide rails of stainless steel. The guide rails with excenter-locking and seals on the filter provide good sealing. The outside of the casing is provided with tappings for connecting a manometer or a filter monitor. Bag filter frames are made of galvanized steel sheet. ) The casing is designed for max. 70 C. Accessories EUPZ-07 manometer Used for measuring the pressure drop across the filter. Pressure range: 0 400 Pa. EUPZ-08 filter monitor Provides remote indication when the pressure drop across the filter has exceeded the preset value ( Pa). Mounting kit and connection components are supplied. EUAZ-01-1 inspection window EUAZ-09 bulkhead light Filter type (bb) 00 = without filter 03 = filter class EU 3 (G 85), synthetic 04 = filter class EU 4 (G 90), synthetic 05 = filter class EU 5 (F 45), synthetic Bag length (c) 0 = without filter 3 = 360 mm Filter make (d) 1 = Camfil Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless Inspection (f) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Filter, for EUPB, set Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Replacement filters Filter type (cc) 03 = filter class EU 3 (G 85), synthetic 04 = filter class EU 4 (G 90), synthetic 05 = filter class EU 5 (F 45), synthetic Bag length (d) 3 = 360 Filter make (e) 1 = Camfil EUPZ-03-bb-cc-3-1 Replacement filter media EUPZ-03 filter element (complete filter) Class EU 3 (G 85) EU 5 (F 45), replacement filters are delivered in sets for the appropriate unit size.

EUPC LONG BAG FILTER Page 68 Specification Long bag filter EUPC-aa-bb-1-0-e-1-g Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Design The filter consists of one or more disposable filter elements, with deep-folded basic or fine filter media. Filter classes as per EUROVENT 4/5 and as per ASHRAE Standard 5 76 (SMS 89). EUROVENT 4/5 Filter class Material 1) EU 3 G 85 Flame-resistant polyester EU 4 G 90 Flame-resistant polyester EU 5 F 45 Flame-resistant polyester EU 6 F 65 Flame-resistant polyester 1) As per DIN 53438, section 3, class F1. The flame-resistant polyester filter material can be used at temperatures up to 100 C ). The filter elements are replaceable. They are mounted on guide rails, and can therefore be easily withdrawn and inserted. The filter section can be ordered with internal components and guide rails of stainless steel. The guide rails with excenter-locking and seals on the filter provide good sealing. The outside of the casing is provided with tappings for connecting a manometer or a filter monitor. Bag filter frames are made of galvanized steel sheet. ) The casing is designed for max. 70 C. Accessories EUPZ-07 manometer Used for measuring the pressure drop across the filter. Pressure range: 0 400 Pa. EUPZ-08 filter monitor Provides remote indication when the pressure drop across the filter has exceeded the preset value ( Pa). Mounting kit and connection components are supplied. EUAZ-01-1 inspection window EUAZ-09 bulkhead light. Filter type (bb) 00 = without filter 03 = filter class EU 3 (G 85), synthetic 05 = filter class EU 5 (F 45), synthetic 06 = filter class EU 6 (F 65), synthetic 07 = filter class EU 7 (F 85), synthetic 08 = filter class EU 8 (F 95), synthetic Filter make (c) 1 = Camfil Prefilter (d) 0 = without Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless Variant (f) 1 = cross section in- and outlet Inspection side (g) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Filter for EUPC, set Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Replacement filters Filter type (cc) 03 = filter class EU 3 (G 85), 05 = filter class EU 5 (F 45), synthetic 06 = filter class EU 6 (F 65), synthetic Filter make (d) 1 = Camfil EUPZ-04-bb-cc-1 Replacement filter media EUPZ-04 filter element (complete filter) Class EU 3 (G 85), EU 5 (F 45), EU 6 (F45), replacement filters are delivered in sets for the appropriate unit size.

EUPD FILTER / COALESCOR Page 69 Specification Filter Coalescor EUPD-aa-b-c Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Design The filter/coalescor consists of a disposible adhesive impregnated glass-fibre pad with graduated density (M80) and a dry glass fibre coalescor safety pad (M81). The cassettes are mounted on guide rails and are thus easy to withdraw and insert. The filter/coalescor unit is high-efficient for removal of large dust concentrations and fine moisture. The outside of the casing is provided with tappings for connection to a manometer or a filter monitor. Accessories EUPZ-07 manometer used for measuring the pressure drop across the filter/coalescor. Pressure range: 0 400 Pa EUPZ-08 filter monitor provides remote indication when the preset value ( Pa). Mounting kit and connection components are supplied. Replacement filter media Drain conn. ø 3 EUPZ-1-bb-1 filter media EUPZ-1-bb- Coalescor media The medias are delivered in sets for the appropriate unit sizes. Filter type (b) 1 = AAF:s KFOA PW (M80) = AAF:s KFOA PD (M81) 3 = AAF:s KFOA PW + PD (M80 + M81) Inspection side (c) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Filter for EUPD Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Replacement filters Filter type (c) 1 = AAF:s KFOA PW (M80) = AAF:s KFOA PD (M81) 3 = AAF:s KFOA PW + PD (M80 + M81) Manometer Filter monitor Differential pressure gauge (type Dwyer Magnahelic) Recessed in inspection door EUPZ-1-bb-c EUPZ-07 EUPZ-08 EUPZ-17

EUP(A,B,C,D) FILTER SECTION Page 70 Dimensions and s L 1 L L 3 L 4 EUPA EUPB EUPC EUPD Pleated filter Short bag Long bag Coalescor filter filter ø 3 x 1,5 EUP(A,B,C) 00 70 EUPD 100 Drain connection ø 3 only EUPD EUPD Size Weight, Weight, Weight, Weight, L 1 kg L kg L 3 kg L 4 kg 0 00 0 400 30 700 45 300 30 1 00 5 400 35 700 55 300 40 00 30 400 45 700 65 300 30 00 35 400 45 700 65 300 55 31 00 35 400 55 700 80 300 60 3 00 40 400 60 700 85 300 65 33 00 400 70 700 100 40 00 45 400 60 700 85 300 70 41 00 400 70 700 100 300 75 4 00 55 400 80 700 110 300 80 00 60 400 80 700 115 300 90 51 00 70 400 95 700 15 300 105 53 00 85 400 110 700 1 300 130

EUME AIR HEATER FOR HOT WATER Page 71 Design Finned heat exchanger available in five capacity variants to cover the usual of heating requirements. The heater can be installed for either horizontal or vertical air flow. The heat exchanger consists of tubes and fins. The header tubes are made of copper and the water connections are made of brass. Water connections up to mm (") have male threads. The heat exchangers are equipped with plugged tappings for venting and drainage or anti-freeze monitor. All sizes can be equipped with a Landis & Gyr type QAE 1.91 antifreeze monitor. One side of the casing can be removed to enable the heat exchanger to be withdrawn. Versions Max. Max. Materials Heating working temp., medium pressure, Tubes Fins MPa Bar C Water 1.6 16 1 Copper Aluminium Water 1.6 16 1 Copper Copper All heaters for higher working pressures and made of different materials are availabe to special order. Accessorises EUAZ-1 welding flange (counterflange) EUAZ-13 threaded flange [for 5 mm (1"), 3 mm (1 1/4") and mm (") tube] EUAZ-18 manual air purging valve EUAZ-19 automatic air purging valve EUAZ-0 nipple Air heater (for hot water) Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Capacity variant (b) 1,, 3, 4, 5 Specification Material, heat exchanger (c) 1 = Cu/Al = Cu/Cu 3 = Cu/Cu, tinned Material, frame (d) 1 = galvanized = stainless Connection side (e) 1 = right-hand = left-hand EUME-aa-b-c-d-e

EUME AIR HEATER FOR HOT WATER Page 7 Water temperature, inlet/outlet 80/60 and 60/45 C. This chart is used for approximate sizing. Accurate sizing by computer is available from Fläkt Woods on request. The charts are applicable to air with a density of 1. kg/m 3 (at t = 0 C). Air heater for low and normal temperature rises on the air side. Air velocity, m/s 4,5 4 3,5 3,5 Air flow, m 3 /h 000 3000 4000 00 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 Size 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 4,5 4 3,5 3,5 Air velocity, m/s Inlet air temp. ti C Air velocity, m/s Inlet air temp. ti C Air velocity, m/s 4,5 4 3-0 -15-10 -5 0 4,5 4 3-0 -15-10 -5 0 1 3 4 5 10 15 Air flow, m 3 /s Inlet/Outlet water temperatures 80/60 C 4,5 1 3 4 5 Capacity variant 4 3 0 10 0 30 40-0 -15-10 -5 0 10 0 30 40 Outlet air temperature, tu C Inlet/Outlet water temperatures 60/45 C 4,5 1 3 4 5 Capacity variant 4 3-10 0 10 0 30 40-0 -15-10 -5 0 0 10 0 30 40 Outlet air temperature, tu C Inlet air temp. ti C Air velocity, m/s Inlet air temp. ti C Air velocity, m/s Example: Given: Air flow 5.5 m 3 /s Inlet air temperature, ti 15 C Inlet water temperature, tri + 80 C Outlet water temperature, tru + 60 C Solution: Plot the air flow rate of 5.5 m 3 /s in the chart on this page. Select unit size 41. Follow the dashed lines in the charts on this page. Read capacity variant 3. Read the outlet air temperature tu = 3 C. Size of EUME 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 Face area, m 0.384 0.519 0.709 0.765 1.045 1.33 1.59 1.34 1.68.04.15.61 3.53

EUME AIR HEATER FOR HOT WATER Page 73 Dimensions and s Right-hand inspection side Cap. variant 1-5 Left-hand inspection side Cap. variant 1-5 E Conn. no. 8 (1/4" BSP) female pipe thread. E 00 00 H D E D E C F F C B S L L Size L C b = 1,, 3 b = 4, 5 B b = 1,, 3 b = 4, 5 D H 0 00 00 804 70 70 85 774 1 00 00 1104 70 70 85 774 00 00 1404 70 70 85 774 30 00 300 1104 73 100 435 1074 31 00 300 1404 73 100 435 1074 3 00 300 1704 73 100 435 1074 33 300 300 004 100 100 435 1074 40 300 300 1404 100 100 585 1374 41 300 300 1704 100 100 585 1374 4 300 300 004 100 100 585 1374 300 300 1704 100 100 735 1674 51 300 300 004 100 100 735 1674 53 300 300 604 100 100 735 1674 Nom. pipe size S 5 60 3 65 95 80 115

EUME AIR HEATER FOR HOT WATER Page 74 Dimensions and s (contd.) Capacity variant 1 Size Weight, kg Nom.pipe F with with size Volume Al. fins Cu. fins E liters 0 36 0 5 5 3 1 36 5 30 5 3 36 30 35 5 4 30 36 35 40 5 5 31 36 45 5 6 3 36 60 5 7 33 68 60 70 10 40 43 60 70 3 9 41 43 65 80 3 10 4 68 75 90 15 43 80 95 3 13 51 68 90 105 19 53 68 105 135 Capacity variant Size Weight, kg Nom.pipe F with with size Volume Al. fins Cu. fins E liters 0 36 0 5 5 3 1 36 5 30 5 3 36 30 35 5 4 30 36 40 45 5 5 31 36 45 55 5 6 3 36 65 3 8 33 68 60 75 13 40 43 60 75 3 9 41 68 70 85 13 4 68 80 95 15 68 80 100 17 51 68 90 115 19 53 68 110 145 Capacity variant 3 Size Weight, kg Nom.pipe F with with size Volume Al. fins Cu. fins E liters 0 58 5 30 5 4 1 58 30 35 5 6 58 35 45 3 8 30 58 45 55 3 9 31 58 55 65 3 11 3 58 65 80 3 14 33 68 70 85 0 40 68 75 90 18 41 68 85 105 0 4 94 95 10 80 31 68 95 15 6 51 94 110 140 80 39 53 94 135 175 80 47 Capacity variant 4 Size Weight, kg Nom.pipe F with with size Volume Al. fins Cu. fins E liters 0 58 5 30 5 4 1 58 35 40 5 6 58 40 3 8 30 58 55 65 3 9 31 58 65 80 3 11 3 68 70 85 16 33 68 75 90 8 40 68 80 100 18 41 94 90 110 80 8 4 94 105 130 80 31 94 110 145 80 36 51 94 15 160 80 39 53 94 155 195 80 47 Capacity variant 5 Size Weight, kg Nom.pipe F with with size Volume Al. fins Cu. fins E liters 0 58 30 35 5 6 1 58 40 3 9 58 60 3 11 30 58 65 80 3 13 31 68 75 90 19 3 68 85 105 33 68 95 115 8 40 68 95 115 4 41 68 110 135 8 4 68 15 1 3 94 130 165 80 45 51 94 1 190 80 53 94 190 35 80 61

EUES AIR HEATER FOR STEAM Page 75 Example Specified: Air flow: q. = 4.0 m3/s Inlet air temperature, ti = 0 C Outlet air temperature tu = +18 C Steam pressure = 600 kpa Design Finned heat exchanger available in two capacity variants to cover the usual of heating requirements. Capacity variant 1 has one heat exchanger and capacity variant two heat exchangers. The air flow through the heater shall be horizontal for all sizes. The finned heat exchanger is constructed from tubes with profiled fins. The header tubes are made of copper and have male threads and the water connections are made of brass. One side of the casing can be removed to enable the heat exchanger to be withdrawn. Solution: Enter the chart on next page with the air flow at 4.0 m3/s. Select unit section size 3. Follow the dashed line in the chart. Select capacity variant 1. Calculation of steam consumption: Total heat demand: P = (tu ti) Cp ρ q. P = 38 1.005 1. 4 = 183.3 kw Latent heat of steam: r = 085 kj/kg (see data for saturated steam) Steam consumption: q. s = 183.3 = 0.088 kg/s 085 Versions All heaters for higher working pressures are available to special order. Max. Max. Materials Heating working temp., medium pressure, Tubes Fins MPa Bar C Steam 1.0 10 185 Copper Aluminium Steam 1.0 10 185 Copper Copper Steam 1.0 10 185 Steel Aluminium Accessorises EUAZ-1 welding flange EUAZ-13 threaded flange [for 5 mm (1"), 3 mm (1 1/4") and mm (") tube] Air heater, for steam Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Output variant (b) 1, Material (cc) 1 = Cu/Al (0 4) = Cu/Cu (0 4) 3 = Fe/Al (, 51, 53) Material, frame (d) 1 = galvanized = stainless Connection side (e) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Specification EUES-aa-b-cc-d-e

EUES AIR HEATER FOR STEAM Page 76 This chart is used for approximate sizing. Accurate sizing by computer is available from Fläkt Woods on request. The charts are applicable to air with a density of 1. kg/m 3 (at t = 0 C). Air heater for low and normal temperature rises on the air side. Air flow, m 3 /h Air velocity, m/s 000 3000 4000 4,5 4 3,5 3 Size 0 00 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 4,5 1 30 31 3 40 33 41 4, 51 5 4 3,5 3 Air velocity, m/s,5,5 0,5 1 3 4 5 10 15 Air flow, m 3 /s Air velocity, m/s 4,5 4 3,5 3 30 40 t u -t i = + C 60 70 80 90 4,5 4 3,5 3 Air velocity, m/s,5,5 t i = + 10 C 0-10 -0-30 Capacity variant Recommended working range for capacity variant Capacity variant 1 Recommended working range for capacity variant 1 00 300 400 0 600 700 800 900 Steam pressure, kpa Symbols ti = Inlet air temperature, C tu = Outlet air temperature, C t = Air temperature rise, C ts = Steam temperature, C Temperature efficiency ηt = t u ti ts ti Air temperature rise t = tu ti Steam consumption qs kg/s is obtained from the expression: qs = P r P = heat requirement, kw r = latent heat of steam, kj/kg Steam Steam Latent heat of Specific pressure temp. steam r volume p s, kpa t s, C kj/kg m 3 /kg 100 100 56 1.694 00 10 00 0.885 300 133 16 0.605 400 144 13 0.46 0 15 107 0.375 600 159 085 0.316 700 165 065 0.73 800 170 048 0.40 900 175 031 0.15

EUES AIR HEATER FOR STEAM Page 77 Dimensions and s Right-hand connection side E E E Left-hand connection side E E E D D D D F F F F F F 100 100 00 100 00 100 00 400 00 400 Capacity variant 1 Capacity variant Capacity variant 1 Capacity variant Nom. pipe Weight, kg Weight, kg Weight, kg with Cu/Al coil with Cu/Cu coil with Fe/Al coil Size size Capacity variant Capacity variant Capacity variant D E F 1 1 1 0 594 5 5 35 55 40 65 1 598 3 5 40 60 75 598 3 45 70 55 85 30 898 3 45 70 55 85 31 898 3 75 55 90 3 898 3 55 85 65 105 33 898 3 60 95 70 115 40 1198 3 55 85 65 105 41 1198 3 60 95 70 115 4 1198 3 65 110 80 130 1410 80 135 70 51 1410 80 155 310 53 1410 80 195 385

EUMK ELECTRIC AIR HEATER Page 78 C 609 Installation and operation Design Electric air heater designed in a low temperature version with finned heating elements. The air heater consists of tubes and fins of aluminium with electric heating rods inserted into the tubes. The finned heating elements have a large heat transfer area which reduce the surface temperature. Maximum fin temperature 10 C. The surface temperature does not exceed 10 C. The air heater may be installed in dry premises and in rooms where there is no risk of fire or explosion. The air heater is designed specifically for air handling units and must not be used for in-duct installation. Each size of the air heater is available in four output variants. The output is controlled with a number of power steps. Each of them will not change the outlet temperature more than 1.5 C. The outlet temperature must not exceed 40 C. Power supply 3 380 V, Hz or 3 440 V, 60 Hz. Minimum air velocity across the face area of the air heater must not be lower than.0 m/s. Unit sizes EUMK 0 53. The air heater is available in different versions to SEMKO, NEMKO, DIN and BS. It also satisfies the provisions of STEV-FS 1988:1 54 group B and has degree of protection IP 54 to SS IEC 59. The air heater is equipped with two independent safety thermostats GT1 and GT. GT1 is an overheating thermostat with manual reset. GT is a temperature limiting thermostat with automatic reset. If the outlet air temperature from the air heater exceeds the preset temperature for GT1, the thermostat opens the electric circuit to the heater and supply air fan. Thermostat GT1 must then be reset manually. When restarting the unit, the temperature control system starts from the first output step. If the outlet from the air heater air temperature exceeds the preset temperature for GT, the thermostat opens the electric circuit to the air heater. The thermostat resets automatically when the temperature has dropped again. The temperature control system starts again from the first output step. The control system for the air heater is interlocked by the fan for supply air. See wiring diagram on page 80. Air heater, electric Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Capacity variant (b) 1,, 3, 4 Voltage (c) = 3 x 380 V, Hz 6 = 3 x 440 V, 60 Hz Material (d) 1 = galvanized = stainless Connection side (e) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Specification EUMK-aa-b-c-d-e

EUMK ELECTRIC AIR HEATER Page 79 C 609 Dimension and s Design particulars Weight, kg Size Output variant 1 3 4 0 40 60 75 105 1 80 105 145 65 100 135 180 30 65 100 135 180 31 90 145 00 70 3 100 160 5 305 33 110 175 340 40 100 160 5 360 41 130 5 315 45 4 155 65 380 510 155 65 380 510 51 180 315 4 610 53 30 415 590 800 Right hand conn. side L Output variant L 1 3 400 4 600 Left hand conn. side L Size 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 Output Face Output Output steps, kw 3 x 380 V, area variant kw H K L M N O P R m 1 18 1..4 4.8 9.6 36.4 4.8 9.6 19. 3 54 3.6 7. 14.4 8.8 0.3 4 7 4.8 9.6 19. 38.4 1 7 1.8 3.6 7. 14.4 54 3.6 7. 14.4 8.8 3 81 5.4 10.8 1.6 1.6 1.6 0. 4 108 7. 14.4 8.8 8.8 8.8 1 35.3 4.7 9.3 18.7 70 4.7 9.3 18.7 37.3 3 105 7 14 8 8 8 0.68 4 140 9.3 18.7 37.3 37.3 37.3 1 35.3 4.7 9.3 18.7 70 4.7 9.3 18.7 37.3 3 105 7 14 8 8 8 0.75 4 140 9.3 18.7 37.3 37.3 37.3 1 55 3.7 7.3 14.6 9.3 110 7.3 14.6 9.3 9.3 9.3 3 165 11 1.0 4 0.5 14.7 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 1 63 4. 8.4 16.8 33.6 16 8.4 16.8 33.6 33.6 33.6 3 190 1.7 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 1.9 4 5 16.8 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 1 78 5. 10.4 0.8 0.8 0.8 156 10.4 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 3 34 15.6 31. 31. 31. 31. 31. 31. 31. 1.55 4 31 (15 steps x 0.8 kw) 1 63 4. 8.4 16.8 33.6 16 8.4 16.8 33.6 33.6 33.6 3 190 1.7 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 1.36 4 5 16.8 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 1 9.5 6. 1.3 4.6 4.6 4.6 184.5 1.3 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 3 77.5 18.5 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 1.66 4 369 (15 steps x 4.6 kw) 1 11.5 7.5 15 30 30 30 5 15 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 3 337.5 (15 steps x.5 kw).0 4 4 (15 steps x 30 kw) 1 11.5 7.5 15 30 30 30 5 15 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 3 337.5 (15 steps x.5kw).08 4 4 (15 steps x 30 kw) 1 135 9 18 36 36 36 70 18 (7 steps x 36 kw) 3 405 (15 steps x 7 kw.53 4 540 (15 steps x 36 kw 1 180 1 (7 steps x 4 kw) 360 (15 steps x 4 kw) 3 540 (15 steps x 36 kw) 3.43 4 70 (30 steps x 4 kw)

EUMK ELECTRIC AIR HEATER Page 80 -Q1 400 V, Hz (415 V, Hz) L1 L 1 L3 3 4 N PE 5 6 -F1 -F -F3 -F -K1 -K1:1 1 3 5 4 6 1 3 5 4 6 U V W 9597 9698 -K -K3 1 3 5 4 6 1 3 5 4 6 -SB1 13 14 Time switch with running reserve -GX1 -HR1 -GT1 -TR1 43 44 A1 A 57 58 C 1 65 66 -K1:1 95 96 97 98 Alarm, supply air fan motor protection has tripped Alarm, overheat thermostat has tripped -K1 A1 A 1 3 4 5 6 13 14 -HR1 A1 A 13 14 1 31 3 43 44 Time delay relay with delayed tripping Recooling heat exchanger,.5 min. Contactor Relay, Overheating thermostat Safety isolating switch, if any 1 3 5 -SB1 4 6 = Included in EUEK supply UVWPE M 3- -M Supply air fan 13 14 5 6 7 8 9 10 E1 Air heater E Element groups 1 17, Max. 40 kw per group (osv) Kont 0 Aut -S1 Aut 5 3 4 Temp. limiting thermostat -GT C 3 4 -K1 -HR1 -RC.1 13 14 13 14 RC RC 1 -RC. -RC.3 -K -GT3 C A1 A 1 3 4 5 6 13 14 Control unit with thermostat and stepping switch (6 8 steps) Contactor, air heater Group E 1, (step 1) Contactor, air heater Group E, (step ) (etc.) Q1 Main switch in equipment cubicle SB1 Safety isolating switch for the supply air fan F Control circuit fuse F1 Fuse for supply air fan F Fuse for element group E1 F3 Fuse for element group E S1 Control switch GX1 Time switch with running reserve TR1 Time-delay relay with delayed tripping HR1 Auxiliary relay K1 Contactor for supply air fan K Contactor for air heater group E1 K3 Contactor for air heater group E K1:1 Motor starter for the supply air fan RC1 Control unit RC Stepping switch unit GT1 Overheating thermostat in the air heater, with manual reset GT Temperature limiting thermostat in the air heater, with automatic reset GT3 Temperature sensor for the control unit

EUML ELECTRIC AIR HEATER Page 81 C 609 Installation and operation Design Electric air heater designed in a version with improved safety class Eexed II C T3 IP 54 with temperature limiting thermostats classified Eexed II C 76. The air heater consists of tube heating elements made fro stainless steel SIS 343 (AISI 316). Maximum element surface temperature 00 C. The surface temperature do not exceed 00 C. The air heater may be installed in rooms classified as gas group II C, temperature class T3. The air heater is designed specifically for air handling units and must not be used for in-duct installation. Each size of the air heater is available in four output variants. The output capacity is divided in four equal interlocked power groups intended for thyristor control. The maximum outlet air temperature just not exceed 40 C. Power supply 3 400 V, Hz; 3 440 V, 60 Hz; 3 660 V, Hz; 3 690 V, 60 Hz. Minimum air velocity across the face area of the air heater must not be lower than m/s. Unit sizes EUML 0 53. The air heater is available in different versions to NEMKO and BS. The air heater is equipped with two independent safety thermostats GT1 and GT. GT1 is an overheating thermostat with manual reset. GT is a temperature limiting thermostat with automatic reset. If the outlet air temperature from the air heater exceeds the preset temperature for GT1, the thermostat opens the electric circuit to the heater and supply air fan. Thermostat GT1 must then be reset manually. When restarting the unit, the temperature control system starts from 10 W power. If the outlet from the air heater air temperature exceeds the preset temperature for GT, the thermostat opens the electric circuit to the air heater. The thermostat resets automatically when the temperature has dropped again. The temperature control system starts again from the lowest power step. The control system for the air heater is interlocked by the fan for supply air. See wiring diagram on page 83. Air heater, electric Explosion-proof, class Eexe Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Capacity variant (b) 1,, 3, 4 Voltage (c) = 3 x 400 V, Hz 7 = 3 x 440 V, 60 Hz 8 = 3 x 660 V, Hz 9 = 3 x 690 V, 60 Hz Specification Material (d) = stainless steel, 333 (AISI 304) 4 = stainless steel, 343 (AISI 316) Connection side (e) 1 = right-hand = left-hand EUML-aa-b-c-d-e

EUML ELECTRIC AIR HEATER Page 8 Dimension and s Design particulars Weight, kg Size Output variant 1 3 4 0 45 60 75 1 60 65 80 95 70 80 100 10 30 75 85 105 130 31 95 105 130 160 3 110 130 160 190 40 10 135 165 00 41 140 160 00 40 4 160 185 35 80 170 190 40 90 51 195 5 85 335 53 85 365 430 Right hand conn. side L Output variant L 1 3 400 4 600 Left hand conn. side L Size 0 1 30 31 3 40 41 4 51 53 Output Face Output Output steps, kw 3 x 380 V, area variant kw H K L M N O P R m 1 18 1..4 4.8 9.6 36.4 4.8 9.6 19. 3 54 3.6 7. 14.4 8.8 0.3 4 7 4.8 9.6 19. 38.4 1 7 1.8 3.6 7. 14.4 54 3.6 7. 14.4 8.8 3 81 5.4 10.8 1.6 1.6 1.6 0. 4 108 7. 14.4 8.8 8.8 8.8 1 35.3 4.7 9.3 18.7 70 4.7 9.3 18.7 37.3 3 105 7 14 8 8 8 0.68 4 140 9.3 18.7 37.3 37.3 37.3 1 35.3 4.7 9.3 18.7 70 4.7 9.3 18.7 37.3 3 105 7 14 8 8 8 0.75 4 140 9.3 18.7 37.3 37.3 37.3 1 55 3.7 7.3 14.6 9.3 110 7.3 14.6 9.3 9.3 9.3 3 165 11 1.0 4 0.5 14.7 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 1 63 4. 8.4 16.8 33.6 16 8.4 16.8 33.6 33.6 33.6 3 190 1.7 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 1.9 4 5 16.8 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 1 63 4. 8.4 16.8 33.6 16 8.4 16.8 33.6 33.6 33.6 3 190 1.7 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 1.36 4 5 16.8 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 1 9.5 6. 1.3 4.6 4.6 4.6 184.5 1.3 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 3 77.5 18.5 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 1.66 4 369 (15 steps x 4.6 kw) 1 11.5 7.5 15 30 30 30 5 15 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 3 337.5 (15 steps x.5 kw).0 4 4 (15 steps x 30 kw) 1 11.5 7.5 15 30 30 30 5 15 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 3 337.5 (15 steps x.5kw).08 4 4 (15 steps x 30 kw) 1 135 9 18 36 36 36 70 18 (7 steps x 36 kw) 3 405 (15 steps x 7 kw.53 4 540 (15 steps x 36 kw 1 180 1 (7 steps x 4 kw) 360 (15 steps x 4 kw) 3 540 (15 steps x 36 kw) 3.43 4 70 (30 steps x 4 kw)

EUML ELECTRIC AIR HEATER Page 83 L1 L L3 N PE HB Q1 1 3 5 F1 1 3 5 F Q1 13 14 S1 Auto SU1 HR1 TR1 1 1 3 4 A1 A 4 3 4 6 K 1 3 5 13 Hand SB1 TR1 14 6 7 K1 A1 A 1 3 5 4 6 K1 4 6 L1 Q1 L RC Q L3 Q3 H1 GT K1 HR1 HR K 6 7 6 7 6 7 A1 A 1 3 5 13 SB1 4 6 11 5 6 7 P*X parallell GT1 GP1 HR1 A1 A HR A1 A M 3~ AIRHEATER TF1 RC RC1 GT3 Q1 SB1 F F1 F F3 S1 Main switch in equipment cubicle Safety isolating switch for the supply air fan Control circuit fuse Fuse for supply air fan Fuse for element group E1 Fuse for element group E Control switch GX1 Time switch with running reserve TR1 Time-delay relay with delayed tripping HR1 Auxiliary relay K1 Contactor for supply air fan K Contactor for air heater group E1 K3 Contactor for air heater group E K1:1 Motor starter for the supply air fan RC1 RC GT1 GT GT3 Control unit Stepping switch unit Overheating thermostat in the air heater, with manual reset Temperature limiting thermostat in the air heater, with automatic reset Temperature sensor for the control unit

EUMN AIR COOLER FOR CHILLED WATER Page 84 Design Finned heat exchanger. Available in four capacity variants which cover the usual range of cooling requirements. The air cooler has a normal face area with headers inside the casing or maximum face area, corresponding to the cross-sectional area of the unit. The headers and connections for maximum face area are enclosed in a projecting casing on the side of the unit section. The unit section must be installed for horizontal air flow. The air cooler consists of copper tubes and aluminium alt. copper fins. The header tubes are made of copper and the water connections are made of brass. Water connections have male threads. The heat exchangers are equipped with plugged tappings for venting and drainage. If the air velocity is between 3 and 4 m/s, the air cooler version with droplet eliminator should be selected, in order to avoid condensate entrainment. The droplet eliminator is made of plastic fins in a stainless steel frame. The pressure drop across the droplet eliminator is low. The air cooler is equipped with a deep stainless steel condensate insulated drain tray. The drain pipe from the drain tray runs through the base frame on the inspection side of the unit and ensures reliable condensate drainage. One side of the casing can be removed to enable the finned element to be withdrawn. Up to 1.6 MPa Operating pressure Accessories EUAZ-08 water trap (negative pressure 800 Pa) EUAZ-1 welding flange EUAZ-13 threaded flange [for 5 mm (1"), 3 mm (1 1/4"), mm (") and 80 mm (3") tube] EUAZ-18 manual air purging valve EUAZ-19 automatic air purging valve EUAZ-0 nipple EUMZ-01 water trap (positive pressure max. 3000 Pa) EUMZ-0 water trap (negative pressure 800 Pa stainless steel) Specification Air cooler EUMN-aa-bb-c-d-e-f-g (for chilled water, stainless steel) Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Capacity variant (bb) 04, 06, 08, 10 Material (c) 1 = Cu/Al = Cu/Cu 3 = Cu/Cu, tinned 6 = Cu/Ti 7 = Cu/Ti, tinned Droplet eliminator (d) 0 = without 1 = with Coil version (e) 1 = normal face area = max. face area Position (f) 1 = upstream of the fan = downstream of the fan Connection side (g) 1 = right-hand = left-hand

EUMN AIR COOLER FOR CHILLED WATER Page 85 This chart is used for approximate sizing. Accurate sizing by computer is available from Fläkt Woods on request. The charts are applicable to air with a density of 1. kg/m 3 (at t = 0 C). The chart is valid for inlet air temperature ti = 8 C and relative humidity ϕ = %. Air flow m 3 /h Content of anti-freezing agent = 0 % 000 3000 4000 00 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 Air velocity, m/s 4 3.5 3.5 Size 0 1 30 31 3 40 41 33 4 51 53 4 3,5 3,5 Air velocity, m/s 1.5 0.5 1 3 4 5 Air flow m 3 /s 10 1,5 15 Inlet/Outlet water temperatures 6/1 C Air velocity, m/s 4 3.5 3.5 10 08 06 04 Capacity variant 4 3.5 3.5 Air velocity, m/s 1.5 6 8 10 1 14 16 18 1.5 0 C Outlet air temperature t u C 14.8 Example: Given: Air flow rate 5.5 m 3 /s Inlet air temperature, t i + 8 C Inlet air relative humidity, ϕi % Inlet water temperature, t ri 6 C Outlet water temperature, t ru 1 C Solution: Plot the air flow rate of 5.5 m 3 /s in the chart on this page. Select unit size 41 with droplet eliminator (air velocity above 3 m/s) Follow the dashed line in the chart on this page. Read capacity variant 04. Read outlet air temperature tu = 14.8 C Size of EUMN 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 Face area, m 0.384 0.519 0.709 0.746 1.03 1.31 1.59 1.34 1.68.04.15.61 3.53

EUMN AIR COOLER, FOR CHILLED WATER Page 86 Dimensions and s Normal face area e= 1 Right-hand connection side Left-hand connection side 100 D D 100 00 F 00 E 00 F 00 E Max face area e= 1 100 Capacity variant L 04 0 06 0 08 600 10 600 L 1 1/4" inside drain conn. Connection 5, 3, have male pipe threads. Connection 80 is intended for welding. Connection tolerance is + / - 5 mm. L Size 0-: Size 30-53: 100 1 Capacity variant 04 Size Nom.pipe Volume Weight, kg size D E F liters c = 1 Al. c = Cu. 0 3 87 30 8 70 80 1 87 30 10 95 110 87 30 14 115 15 30 87 45 16 115 135 31 87 45 1 145 175 3 87 45 8 175 15 33 87 45 35 00 40 80 101 585 30 170 10 41 80 101 585 35 05 55 4 80 101 585 41 35 95 80 101 75 44 40 300 51 80 101 75 61 75 3 53 x 80 101 369 567 76 3 4 Capacity variant 08 Size Nom.pipe Volume Weight, kg size D E F liters c = 1 Al. c = Cu. 0 3 05 30 14 95 115 1 05 30 0 130 160 05 30 7 165 05 30 80 05 45 30 165 10 31 80 05 45 41 05 65 3 80 05 45 55 330 33 80 05 45 64 95 395 40 80 05 585 53 35 41 80 05 585 64 300 400 4 80 05 585 83 345 460 x 80 05 369 567 91 355 480 51 x 80 05 369 567 106 410 560 53 x 80 05 369 567 135 530 730 Capacity variant 06 Size Nom.pipe Volume Weight, kg size D E F liters c = 1 Al. c = Cu. 0 3 144 30 11 80 95 1 144 30 15 110 130 144 30 0 135 165 30 144 45 3 135 165 31 80 144 45 3 170 15 3 80 144 45 39 10 65 33 80 144 45 49 45 315 40 80 144 585 41 05 65 41 80 144 585 49 30 4 80 144 585 58 85 375 80 144 75 63 90 380 51 80 144 75 84 340 4 53 80 144 75 106 430 580 Capacity variant 10 Size Nom.pipe Volume Weight, kg size D E F liters c = 1 Al. c = Cu. 0 3 63 30 17 105 130 1 63 30 5 140 175 63 30 3 180 40 30 80 63 45 4 180 35 31 80 63 45 49 5 300 3 80 63 45 60 85 375 33 80 63 45 94 30 4 40 80 63 585 63 80 370 41 80 63 585 94 35 460 4 80 63 585 10 385 540 x 80 63 369 567 109 395 555 51 x 80 63 369 567 18 460 6 53 x 80 63 369 567 164 600 860

EUMP AIR COOLER FOR EVAPORATIVE REFRIGERANT Page 87 Design Finned heat exchanger. Available in four capacity variants which cover the usual range of cooling requirements. The air cooler is designed for R and R refrigerant. Air coolers designed for R1 refrigerant are available to special order. The air cooler has a normal face area with headers inside the casing or maximum face area, corresponding to the cross-sectional area of the unit. The headers and expansion valve with bulb for maximum face area are enclosed in a projecting casing on the side of the unit section. This unit section must be installed for horizontal air flow. The air cooler consists of copper tubes and profiled aluminium alt. copper fins. The headers and distributor tubes are made of copper, and the distributors of brass. The connections are designed for brazing. If the air velocity is between 3 and 4 m/s, the version fitted with droplet eliminator should be selected, in order to avoid condensate entrainment. The droplet eliminator is made of plastic fins in a stainless steel frame. The presssure drop across the droplet eliminator is low. The air cooler is equipped with a deep stainless steel condensate drain tray. The drain pipe from the drain tray runs through the base frame on the inspection side of the unit and ensures reliable condensate drainage. One side of the casing can be removed to enable the finned element to be withdrawn. Up to 1.4 MPa Operating pressure Accessories EUAZ-08 water trap (negative pressure 800 Pa) EUAZ-1 expansion valve EUMZ-01 water trap (positive pressure max. 3000 Pa) EUMZ-0 water trap (negative pressure 800 Pa stainless steel) Air cooler (for evaporative refrigerant stainless steel) Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Capacity variant (bb) 04, 06, 08, 10 Material (c) 1 = Cu/Al = Cu/Cu 3 = Cu/Cu, tinned Droplet eliminator (d) 0 = without 1 = with Specification EUMP-aa-bb-c-d-e-f-g Capacity stages (e) 1 = 1 stage, R, R (aa = 0 41), R 134a, R 407c = equal stages interlaced, R, R, R 134a, R 407c Position (f) 1 = upstream of the fan = downstream of the fan Connection side (g) 1 = right-hand = left-hand

EUMP AIR COOLER FOR EVAPORATIVE REFRIGERANT Page 88 This chart is used for approximate sizing. Accurate sizing by computer is available from Fläkt Woods on request. The charts are applicable to air with a density of 1. kg/m 3 (at t = 0 C). The chart is valid for inlet air temperature ti = 8 C and relative humidity ϕ = %. Air flow, m 3 /h 000 3000 4000 00 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 4 4 Air velocity, m/s 3,5 3,5 Size 0 1 30 31 3 40 41 33 4 51 53 3,5 3,5 Air velocity, m/s 1,5 1,5 0,5 1 3 4 5 10 15 Air flow, m 3 /s Air velocity m/s 4 3.5 3.5 10 Evaporation temperature, + 5 C 08 06 04 Capacity variant 4 3.5 3.5 Air velocity m/s 1.5 6 8 10 1 14 16 18 0 Outlet air temperature, t u C 1.5 Example: Given: Air flow rate 5.5 m 3 /s Inlet air temperature, ti + 8 C Inlet air relative humidity, ϕi % Evaporation temperature + 5 C Solution: Plot the air flow rate of 5.5 m 3 /s in the chart on this page. Select unit size 41 with droplet eliminator (air velocity above 3 m/s) Follow the dashed lines in the charts on this page. Read capacity variant 04. Read outlet air temperature tu = 14 C. Size of EUMP 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 Face area, m 0.384 0.519 0.709 0.746 1.03 1.31 1.59 1.34 1.68.04.15.61 3.53

EUMP AIR COOLER FOR EVAPORATIVE REFRIGERANT Page 89 Dimensions and s Right-hand connection side 1 Stage e=1 øc Stages e= øe øf øc 1 Stage e=1 Left-hand connection side øe øf Stages e= 4 L ød 1 100 100 H L øg ød øg 67 J H 100 1 1/4" drain conn. female threads 100 Capacity variant 04 Size Volume Weight, kg øc ød øe øf øg H J liters c = 1 Al. c = Cu. 0 8.6 15.9 15.9 8.6 10 10 8 70 80 1 34.9 15.9 15.9 8.6 13 10 10 95 110 41.3 8.6 17 10 14 115 15 30 41.3 15.9 8.6 133 10 16 115 135 31 54 34.9 133 13 1 145 175 3 54 34.9 133 13 8 175 15 33 54 34.9 133 13 35 00 40 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 30 170 10 41 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 35 05 55 4 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 41 35 95 41.3 17 44 40 300 51 41.3 17 61 75 3 53 8.6 8.6 54 17 76 3 4 L øg 67 øg J 100 L Size 0-: Size 30-53: Capacity variant L 04 0 06 0 08 600 10 600 100 1 Capacity variant 06 Size Volume Weight, kg øc ød øe øf øg H J liters c = 1 Al. c = Cu. 0 8.6 15.9 15.9 8.6 10 10 11 80 95 1 34.9 15.9 15.9 8.6 13 10 15 110 130 41.3 34.9 17 13 0 135 165 30 41.3 34.9 17 13 3 135 165 31 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 3 170 15 3 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 39 10 65 33 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 49 45 315 40 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 41 05 65 41 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 49 30 4 54 133 58 85 375 54 133 63 90 380 51 8.6 8.6 54 133 84 340 4 53 8.6 8.6 54 133 106 430 580 Capacity variant 08 Size Volume Weight, kg øc ød øe øf øg H J liters c = 1 Al. c = Cu. 0 34.9 15.9 15.9 8.6 13 10 14 95 115 1 41.3 8.6 17 10 0 130 160 54 34.9 133 13 7 165 05 30 54 34.9 133 13 30 165 10 31 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 41 05 65 3 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 55 330 33 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 64 95 395 40 54 133 53 35 41 54 133 64 300 400 4 54 133 83 345 460 8.6 8.6 54 133 91 355 480 51 8.6 8.6 54 133 106 410 560 53 Capacity variant 10 Size Volume Weight, kg øc ød øe øf øg H J liters c = 1 Al. c = Cu. 0 34.9 15.9 15.9 8.6 13 10 17 105 130 1 41.3 34.9 17 13 5 140 175 54 34.9 133 13 3 180 40 30 8.6 54 34.9 133 13 4 180 35 31 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 49 5 300 3 8.6 54 41.3 133 17 60 85 375 33 54 133 94 30 4 40 54 133 63 80 370 41 54 133 94 35 460 4 8.6 8.6 54 133 10 385 540 8.6 8.6 54 133 109 395 555 51 53

Page 90 EUQA HUMIDIFIER 1) ) 40 800 15 3) Design Evaporative humidifier, designed for once-through water from separate tank system. The water evaporates from wet, unheated fills of CROSS-FILL type, i.e. hygroscopic, corrugated glass fibre sheet. This provides excellent contact between the air and water, thus ensuring a high humidification rate. The humidifier is available in two versions, for different humidification rates: up to 85% up to 60%. The water supply system includes constant flow valve, internal pipework and a distributor, all of which are made of corrosion-resistant materials. The water tray is made of stainless steel. The drain pipe from the drain tray runs through the base frame on the inspection side of the unit and ensures reliable condensate drainage. The humidifier is always equipped with a droplet eliminator made of plastic fins in a stainless steel frame. The components of the humidifier are easy to dismantle. The humidifier fills and other components can be removed through the inspection panel for cleaning, thus completely exposing the water tray. The humidifier must be installed for horizontal air flow. Accessories EUAZ-01-1 inspection window EUAZ-08 water trap (size 53: pieces) EUAZ-09 light fitting (without switch or cable). The light fitting is factory-fitted in place. Temperature The maximum permissible air temperature upstream of the humidifier is 70 C. Humidifier water system, see page 19. 1) Cable entry ) Conn. 5 fem. (1/ ) Water supply 3) Conn. 3 fem. (1 1/4 ) Water draining Humidifier, evaporative Unit size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Humidification rate (b) 3 = 85% glass fibre 4 = 60% glass fibre Version (c) 3 = Direct water Inspection side (d) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Size Weight, kg 0 70 1 85 105 30 105 31 10 3 140 40 140 41 155 4 170 170 51 0 53 Specification EUQA-aa-b-3-d-1

EUMQ STEAM/SPRAY HUMIDIFIER Page 91 Size aa = 51, 53 EUM (N, P) Size aa = 0 31 Size aa = 3 A A B A B C 100 00 Size 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 A 397 397 547 547 747 397 397 397 547 547 547 397 547 B 747 747 747 947 947 187 747 947 C 187 19 Weight, kg 5 30 35 35 35 40 45 40 45 60 Design Orifice plate (steam) Female threads BSP 3/8" Specification Female threads BSP 3/8 " (Spray) The steam/spray humidifier section is provided with either steam lances or flanges for connecting spray nozzles. A drop tray of stainless steel discharges the condense water into the following cooling coil drain tray. The humidifier section must therefore be placed upstream a cooling coil. Dimensioning of orifice plate for steam The orifice plate for sizes 3, 33, 40, 41, 4 and (two steam pipes) is to be dimensioned for half the air flow. For sizes 51 and 53 (three steam pipes) one third of the air flow shall be used. Orifice plate for steam humudifier EUMQ giving a humidification corresponding to 3 grams of steam per kg air. The orifice plate no. refers to the code suffix for the diameter of the opening. Example: At an air flow of.8 m3/s and a steam pressure of 0 kpa, a no. 6 throttling flange should be selected. (See chart). Air flow, m 3 /h 000 3000 4000 00 10 000 0 000 30 000 Steam/Spray humidifier EUMQ-aa-b-c-d Mounted upstream of EUM(N,P) air cooler Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Type (b) 1 = 1 spray pipe connection (c = 0) = spray pipe connection (c = 0) 4 = 4 spray pipe connection (c = 0) 5 = steam (incl. lances) (c = 1 9) Orifice plate, hole diameter mm (c) 0 = without 5 = 4.5 1 =.5 6 = 5.4 =.75 7 = 6.5 3 = 3.3 8 = 7.6 4 = 3.8 9 = 8.7 Position (d) 1 = right-hand side (b = 1, 5) = left-hand side (b = 1, 5) 3 = allocated on right and left hand side (b =, 4) 4 = allocated on right-hand side and top (b =, 4) 5 = allocated on left-hand side and top (b =, 4) Air flow, m 3 /s 0,3 0,4 0,5 1 3 4 5 6 Orifice plate 1 3 4 5 6 EUMQ Spray humidifier, see page 9. 7 8 9 1 00 300 400 0 600 800 Steam pressure, kpa

Page 9 EUMQ SPRAY HUMIDIFIER EUTC EMPTY SECTION EUMQ Spray humidifier EUTC Empty section Spray humidifier b = 1,, 4 Female threads BSP 3/4 (Spray) d=1 b=1 d= b=1 d=3 b= d=4 b= d=5 b= b= b= b=4 b=4 b=4 Design = = A The empty section is available in nine different lengths, with or without inspection panel. The empty section is used: as an intermediate section in units which include sections that may need additional access facilities for service, such as between two finned heat exchangers. together with the EUVH-04 jointing frame for connecting sections of different sizes. for accommodating components not included in the standard range. for by-pass duct connections on top or rear side. Accessories = 00 = = EUTZ-01 damper EUTZ-0 flexible connection EUTZ-03 connection piece EUTZ-04 counterflange EUAZ-01-1 inspection window (section length 300) EUAZ-09 bulkhead light EUAZ-3 earthing cable (flexible connection) C B 00 Size A B C 0 430 310 30 30 3 580 410 330 40 4 730 510 430 53 880 610 530

EUTC EMPTY SECTION Page 93 Specification Replacement filters Empty section EUTC-aa-b-c-d-e Damper for (EUTC) EUTZ-01-bb-c-d-e-f Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 mm (b) 1 = 100 1) 4 = 400 7 = 700 = 00 5 = 0 8 = 800 3 = 300 6 = 600 9 = 900 Duct connection (c) 0 = without 1 = at the top (b = 3 9) = side opposite inspection side (b = 5 9) 3 = at the bottom (b = 3 9) Inspection door (d) 0 = without inspection door 1 = with inspection door (b = 9) = with insp. door for positive pressure (b = 5 9) 3 = with drainage tray (b = 3 9, c = 0 ) 4 = with door and drainage tray (b = 5 9, c = 0 ) Inspection side (e) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand mm (EUTC) (c) 3 = 300 7 = 700 4 = 400 8 = 800 5 = 0 9 = 900 6 = 600 Position (d) 1 = top/bottom ) = rear side Damper type (e) = type 4 galvanized CEN 3 5 = type 4 stainless CEN 4 Connection (f) 1 = PG-joint = flange ) Assembled on bottom of empty section if baseframe EUAZ-04 is ordered. 1) Not for single block. Flexible connection (EUTC) Connection piece (EUTC) Counterflange (EUTC) EUTZ-0-bb-c-d-e EUTZ-03-bb-c-d-e EUTZ-04-bb-c-d-e Unit size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 mm (EUTC) (c) 3 = 300 7 = 700 4 = 400 8 = 800 5 = 0 9 = 900 6 = 600 Position (d) 1 = top = rear side Connection type (e) 1 = PG-joint, galvanized steel (not for EUTZ-04) = flange connection, galvanized steel 3 = PG-joint, stainless steel (not for EUTZ-04) 4 = flange connection, stainless steel

Page 94 EUTC EMPTY SECTION Dimensions and s EUTZ-01 H E C D J J F G L Size Weight. kg for length L C D F G 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 800 900 0 15 599 187 600 5 10 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 1 15 800 87 600 5 10 0 5 30 35 40 55 15 1100 87 600 5 10 0 30 35 40 55 60 30 15 800 137 800 10 15 0 30 35 40 55 60 31 15 1100 137 800 10 15 5 30 40 45 55 60 70 3 15 1400 137 800 10 15 5 35 45 60 70 75 33 15 1700 137 800 15 0 30 40 45 55 65 75 85 40 15 1100 87 100 10 15 5 35 45 60 70 75 41 15 1400 87 100 15 0 30 40 45 55 65 75 85 4 15 1700 87 100 15 0 30 40 60 70 80 95 15 1400 137 1400 15 5 30 40 60 70 80 95 51 15 1700 137 1400 15 5 35 45 55 65 80 90 100 53 30 000 137 1400 0 30 40 65 75 90 105 115 Opening and damper are accessories for L 300 900 only. L = 100 and 00 mm long empty sections are not supplied as a single block. L 300 400 0 600 700 800 900 E 00 00 400 400 600 600 800 H 100 100 100 Damper fitted in top, damper dim. D x E and length J. L 300 400 0 600 700 800 900 Size D E 00 00 400 400 600 600 800 0 0 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 1 800 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 1100 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 30 800 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 31 1100 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 3 1400 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 33 1700 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 40 1100 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 41 1400 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 4 1700 x 15 15 15 15 5 15 15 1400 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 51 1700 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 53 000 x 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Damper fitted in side, damper dim. G x E and length J. L 300 400 0 600 700 800 900 Size G E 00 00 400 400 600 600 800 0 600 x 15 15 15 15 15 1 600 x 15 15 15 15 15 600 x 15 15 15 15 15 30 800 x 15 15 15 15 15 31 800 x 15 15 15 15 15 3 800 x 15 15 15 15 15 33 800 x 15 15 15 15 15 4 100 x 15 15 15 15 15 41 100 x 15 15 15 15 15 4 100 x 15 15 15 15 15 1400 x 15 15 15 15 15 51 1400 x 15 15 15 15 15 53 1400 x 15 15 15 15 15

EUL(B,F) CENTRIFUGAL FAN Page 95 C 609 Air flow control Throttle control of the EULF fan by means of a damper in the system is advisable at lower rates of air flow, normally below 1.4 m3/s. At higher rates of air flow, it is advisable to use inlet guide vane control for the EULB fan. This method of control is available for all unit sizes and consists of mechanically interconnected variable pitch guide vanes incorporated into the fan inlet. For sizing examples of guide vane control and throttle control, see pages 160 163. Design Double-inlet, belt-driven centrifugal fan. Within a given unit size, the choice is available between: two types of impeller impeller with backward curved blades in normal or heavy-duty design spark-proof design fans of different sizes air flow measuring device In addition, scope is available for combining different unit sections with a fan from the nearest larger or smaller unit size, and the connection is then made by means of the EUVH-04 jointing frame. Design particulars Desig- Impeller type Max. Max. Max. efnation (blades) air flow, pressure, ficiency, m 3 /s Pa % EULB EULF Backward-curved Double inlet Forward-curved Double inlet 14.1 3300 85 14.1 1800 71 Accessories EULZ-01 flexible connection, outlet EULZ-0 duct connection piece, outlet EULZ-03 counterflange, outlet EULZ-04 protective screen, outlet EULZ-10 spare belts, set for EULT (ordered with EULT) EULZ-11 spare belts, set for EULV (ordered with EULV) EULZ-13 air distributor (together with empty section EUTC) EULZ-14 diffusor (together with empty section EUTC) EULZ-4 screen protection door EULZ-5 telper beam EULZ-6 earthing cable (fan to casing) EUAZ-01-1 inspection window EUAZ-09 bulkhead light EUAZ-3 earthing cable (flexible connection EULZ-01) To ensure good vibration isolation and structure-borne sound insulation, the fan and motor are mounted on a sturdy base frame which is effectively isolated from the casing by means of rubber anti-vibration mountings. The anti-vibration mountings are selected for induced and natural frequencies below 8 Hz. In order to avoid vibrations in the connected ducting or other sections of the unit, the fan outlet is connected to the casing by means of a flexible connection of fire-resistant material. The impeller shaft is mounted in ball bearings located at both inlets. The bearings are either permanently lubricated (smaller sizes) or provided with grease nipples and grease overflow valves (larger sizes). All bearings are secured to the shaft by means of circlips on the smaller sizes and clamping sleeves on the larger sizes, both methods ensuring a reliable joint and vibration-free operation. The bearing blocks are rigidly mounted on radial support arms.

EUL(B,F) CENTRIFUGAL FAN Page 96 Specification Specification Centrifugal fan EULB-aa-b-c-d-e-ff-1-h Centrifugal fan EULF-aa--1-d-e-ff-g-h Unit size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 1) 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Unit size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Fan size (b), 3 Fan size (b) Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy-duty (from aa b = 3) Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes (aa = 1 53) 3 = spark-proof design 5 = air flow meter, q-nozzle 6 = spark-proof design + air flow meter, q-nozzle Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 05 06 08 Motor location (g) 1 = one motor, inside, rubber anti-vibration mountings 3 = one motor, inside, steel spring anti-vibration mountings, horizontal installation Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Connection to EU-unit Connection to EU-unit Version (c) 1 = normal Equipment (d) 0 = without 3 = spark-proof design 5 = air flow meter, q-nozzle 6 = spark-proof + air flow meter, q-nozzle Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless steel (epoxy-painted fan housing and wheel) Inlet and discharge (ff) 01 0 03 04 05 06 08 Motor location (g) 1 = one motor, inside, rubber anti-vibration mountings 3 = one motor inside, steel spring anti-vibration mountings, horizontal installation Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Connection to EU-unit Connection to EU-unit 1) aa = 33 only for ff = 01, 04

EUL(B,F) CENTRIFUGAL FAN Page 97 Dimensions and s ff = 01, 0, 03, 04, R S F D Cross section inlet 01 0 03 04 EULZ-01,0,03,04 T D E C D L Size aa 0 1 30 31 3 Fan size b C D E F 57 90 45 46 3 4 30 48 516 37 360 58 544 3 3 404 66 481 0 404 76 481 3 475 ) 310 704 3 404 66 481 3 35 454 300 607 4 4 333 69 3 417 570 355 634 s 1) 809 570 401 434 3 53 640 371 64 L 900 1000 1100 1100 1100 1300 1100 1300 1400 10 1300 1600 R 700 700 700 900 900 900 EUL(B,F) S T Wgt., kg 00 300 85 400 400 95 400 400 115 400 0 10 400 0 1 600 0 165 00 0 135 400 0 160 0 600 00 600 600 5 400 600 40 700 800 75 33 96 640 34 3) 1300 900 400 800 70 40 41 4 51 53 417 570 355 634 3 38 640 366 64 53 640 371 64 3 495 714 410 736 s 1) 957 714 54 406 3 60 800 457 708 495 714 410 736 3 45 800 347 708 60 800 457 708 3 55 900 57 860 s 1) 1176 900 64 460 3 80 1000 541 979 10 1600 1600 1800 10 1900 1800 1900 1900 00 1800 0 900 900 900 900 900 900 600 600 700 800 75 700 800 95 900 800 385 600 800 380 1000 1000 430 900 800 410 1000 1000 435 1000 1000 460 1300 1000 540 900 1000 5 x800 100 840 1) = motor adjacent to fan ) 455 mm wide; 360 mm high 3) Size 33: only outlet ff = 01, 04 WEIGHT INCLUDING BELT DRIVE

EUL(B,F) CENTRIFUGAL FAN Page 98 Dimensions and s ff = 05, 06, 08 F R S D Cross section inlet 05 06 08 EULZ-01,0,03,04 T D E C D L Size aa 0 1 30 31 3 40 41 4 51 53 Fan size b C D E F 57 90 111 560 3 4 30 104 65 37 360 95 665 3 3 404 11 636 0 404 1 636 3 475 ) 18 865 3 404 11 636 3 35 454 114 791 4 4 13 836 3 417 570 13 870 s 1) 809 570 179 6 3 53 640 97 905 417 570 13 870 3 38 640 13 905 53 640 137 905 3 495 714 137 101 s 1) 957 714 70 711 3 60 800 148 1045 495 714 137 101 3 45 800 137 1045 60 800 148 1045 3 55 900 166 10 s 1) 1176 900 85 80 3 80 1000 151 1396 L 900 1000 1100 1100 1100 1300 1100 1300 1400 10 1300 1600 10 1600 1600 1800 10 1900 1800 1900 1900 00 1800 0 R 700 700 700 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 EUL(B,F) S T Wgt., kg 00 300 85 400 400 95 400 400 115 400 0 10 400 0 1 600 0 165 00 0 135 400 0 160 0 600 00 600 600 5 400 600 40 700 800 75 600 600 700 800 75 700 800 95 900 800 385 600 800 380 1000 1000 430 900 800 410 1000 1000 435 1000 1000 460 1300 1000 540 900 1000 5 x800 100 840 1) = motor adjacent to fan ) 455 mm wide; 360 mm high WEIGHT INCLUDING BELT DRIVE

EUL(T,V) BELT DRIVE APAM, ATAM, ARAM motor Page 99 EUL(T,V) Belt drive Specification Belt drive for EULB fan EULT-aa-b-c-d-eeee Unit size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Fan size (b) 3 Design The belt drive consists of pulleys and one or more belts. The pulleys have a separate hub which allows for quick replacement of the rim if the fan speed should need to be altered. A totally enclosing belt guard is available as an accessory. The belt drives are designed for Hz and 60 Hz motors. If other motors are employed, please consult your nearest Fläkt Woods representative. APAM, ATAM, ARAM motor Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts 7 = flatbelt (Habacit) Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1) 1 = protection guard, for belt and inlet, galvanized = protection guard, for belt and inlet, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) 1) Screen protection door EULZ-4 can be used. Belt drive for EULF fan EULV-aa--c-d-eeee The motor is mounted on slide rails for convenient adjustment of the belt tension. Single-speed or two-speed motors are available as standard. Fan section with space for two motors is available to special order. On all sizes, this increases the length of the fan section by 360 mm. The motor has degree of protection IP 54. To ensure satisfactory cooling of the motor, the ambient temperature of the ventilation air should not exceed 40 C. Motors suitable for higher temperatures are available to special order. For further particulars of motors, such as the maximum permissible starting time, see under Fan Starting Methods, pages 167 170. Unit size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Fan size (b) Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal min. two belts 7 = flatbelt (Habacit) Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1) 1 = protection guard, for belt and inlet, galvanized = protection guard, for belt and inlet, epoxi-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) 1) Screen protection door EULZ-4 can be used.

REGOTERM EUMF ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT Page 100 Drive unit The drive unit consists of a constant speed motor driving the rotor by means of a belt transmission. Casing rotor unit Design The energy recovery unit consists of a casing, a hygroscopic rotor, and a drive unit. The recovery unit can be installed for: horizontal air flow cooling and heat recovery Rotor The recovery unit operates at a low pressure drop and at high and permanent temperature and moisture efficiencies up to 85%. The rotor is rigidly mounted to the centre beam, but can be rolled out on its shaft or be lifted inside the casing to facilitate service and cleaning. The rotor is made of aluminium. A hygroscopic rotor transfers both heat and moisture. The marine version of the rotor is suitable for operation in very hot and humid climates. The rotor: is supplied with edge-reinforced face surfaces for corrosive environments is designed for service at temperatures up to + C is always equipped with purging sector is always hygroscopic has always constant speed about 0 r/min. The recovery unit is made of stainless sheet steel. The drive motor is available classified as per Lloyd's Register of Shipping or Det norske Veritas. Temperature limitations imposed by the drive motor To safeguard efficient cooling if the drive motor is located inside the casing, the temperature in the area where the motor is located must never exceed +40 C. The rotor unit consists of the rotor, drive unit, purging sector, bearing mountings and the partitions with seals. For periodic maintenance, access to the upper air passages where they meet the rotor is required to enable lifting the rotor inside the casing or withdrawing the rotor by rolling it on its shaft through the inspection door opening and out of the casing. Withdrawing the rotor for service requires a clear space at the inspection side corresponding to half the width of the REGOTERM casing. Purging of the rotor passages takes place in the purging sector, which is adjustable between 0 C and 6 C. Purging minimises the carry-over of exhaust air to the supply air. An effective seal in the gap between the rotor and the casing minimises the leakage between the supply and exhaust air side. Installation The EUMF energy recovery unit for horizontal air flow is designed for installation in a stacked arrangement in which the supply air unit is at the bottom. If the supply air unit is installed at the top. The direction of rotation of the recovery unit is reversed. Specification Energy recovery unit REGOTERM Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Power supply, motor (b) 1 = 3 x 30/400 V, Hz 6 = 3 x 55/440 V, 60 Hz 8 = 3 x 400/660 V, Hz Motor classification (c) 0 = no classification 3 = Lloyd's Register of Shipping 4 = Det norske Veritas Inspection side (d) 1 = right-hand = left-hand EUMF-aa-b-c-d

Page 101 REGOTERM EUMF ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT Accessories EURZ-0 speed detector Initiates an alarm automatically if the rotor should unintentionally stop. EUMZ-03 spacer beam (fitted) Motor particulars EUMF Rated Rated Classicode Motor size out- cur- ficasuffix put, rent, tion aa -b-c W A -1-0 MT 71A 3 x 30/400 V, Hz 90-6-0 MT 71A 3 x 55/440 V, 60 Hz 110-8-0 MT 71B 3 x 400/690 V, Hz 10 0.95/ 0.55 0.95/ 0.55 0.65/ 0.4 Unclassified 0, 1,, 30, 31, 3, 33-1-3 MT 71A 3 x 30/400 V, Hz 80-6-3 MT 71A 3 x 55/440 V, 60 Hz 100-8-3 MT 71B 3 x 400/690 V, Hz 100 0.87/ 0.5 0.87/ 0.5 0.6/ 0.35 Lloyd's Register of Shipping -1-4 MT 71B 3 x 30/400 V, Hz 100-6-4 MT 71A 3 x 55/440 V, 60 Hz 100-8-4 MT 71B 3 x 400/690 V, Hz 100 1.05/ 0.6 0.87/ 0.5 0.6/ 0.35 Det norske Veritas 40, 41, 4-1-0 MT 63B- 3 x 30/380 40 V, Hz, 51, 53-1-0 MT 71B-4 3 x 30/400 V, Hz 370 40,, -6-0 MT 63B- 3 x 55/440 480 V, 60 Hz 300 41, 51, 4, 53, -8-0 MT 71B-4 3 x 400/690 V, Hz 370 40, 41, 4-1-3 MT 63B- 3 x 30/400 V, Hz, 51, 53-1-3 MT 71B-4 3 x 30/400 V, Hz 370-6-3 MT 63B- 3 x 55/440 V, 60 Hz 30 1.4/ 0.8.1/ 1. 1.4/ 0.8 1.3/ 0.75 1.3/ 0.75.1/ 1. 1.4/ 0.8 Unclassified Lloyd's Register of Shipping 40, 41, 4,, 51, 53-8-3 MT 71B-4 3 x 400/690 V, Hz 370-1-4 MT 71B-4 3 x 30/400 V, Hz 370-6-4 MT 71B-4 3 x 55/440 V, 60 Hz 0-8-4 MT 71B-4 3 x 400/690 V, Hz 370 1.3/ 0.75.1/ 1../ 1.5 1.3/ 0.75 Det norske Veritas

REGOTERM EUMF ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT Page 10 Efficiency REGOTERM has a very high efficiency for temperature and moisture recovery (see Charts 1 and ). Since its efficiency can be maintained even at extremely low temperatures (see under Defrosting), in most applications, REGOTERM offers considerable savings on power. This can provide appreciable reduction in the initial cost of the installation. Temperature efficiency Chart 1 η t (%) 85 80 3,33 30,31 Size 0,1,51 53 4 40,41 q /q 3 Supply air/exhaust air flow rate 1,4 1, 1,0 0,8 0,6 75 70 0,5 1 3 5 10 Air flow rate m 3 /s 14 60 70 80 90 95 Temperature efficiency n t. % Temperature and humidity efficiency Chart 100 80 ηt Efficiency η, % 60 40 0 ηx Hygroscopic rotor 0 0 10 0 30 40 60 70 80 90 100 % of max. speed

REGOTERM EUMF ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER Page 103 Dimensions and s B Size Storlek 1 1- H ød B 5 5 400 E A E C B Size Storlek 30 53 31-53 H ød B 5 5 400 E A E C Weight (kg) Size A B C D ø E H b = 1 Normal 0 730 774 1404 10 337 1548 15 1 1030 774 1404 10 187 1548 195 1330 774 1604 1370 137 1548 5 30 1030 1074 1804 1580 387 148 310 31 1330 1074 1804 1580 37 148 90 3 1630 1074 004 1780 187 148 315 33 1930 1074 004 1780 37 148 95 40 1330 1374 4 00 587 748 465 41 1630 1374 4 00 437 748 480 4 1930 1374 704 400 387 748 535 1630 1674 3004 700 687 3348 840 51 1930 1674 3004 700 537 3348 815 53 530 1674 3304 3000 387 3348 860 On-piece Sectorized Split rotor rotor casing

DUOVENT EUMD AIR DISTRIBUTION SECTION Page 104 Design The air distributor is intended for the DUOVENT system and includes withdrawable air heater for hot water or steam. Connection can be either on the leftor right-hand side. The air distributor is provided with a specific number of branches on the end wall, for connection to the MINIDUCT ducting system, with one or two rows of branches on roof (see page 111). All MINIDUCT branches can be equipped with nonreturn smoke dampers to air tightness class T4. (T5; CEN 4) Actuator for non-return smoke dampers are to be sized and delivered by Fläkt Woods. Min. torque required: Nm/branch The air distributor can alternatively be provided with rectangular PG-fittings. Air distribution section DUOVENT system Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Specification Heating medium, material (b) 1 = water, Cu/Al, 4 tube rows = steam, Cu/Al 3 = water, Cu/Cu, 4 tube rows 4 = steam, Cu/Cu 5 = water, Cu/Al, 6 tube rows 6 = water, Cu/Cu, 6 tube rows EUMD-aa-b-c-d-e-f Connection (c) 1 = MINIDUCT end wall = MINIDUCT end wall, roof 3 = rectangular duct, end wall 4 = rectangular duct, end wall, roof 5 = MINIDUCT end wall, roof extra large Non-return smoke damper (d) 0 = without MINIDUCT (ø 160) or rect. duct 1 = with (c = 1,, 5) MINIDUCT ø 160 = with (c = 1,, 5) MINIDUCT ø 00 Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless steel Inspection side (f) 1 = right-hand = left-hand

DUOVENT EUMD AIR DISTRIBUTION SECTION Page 105 Water temperature, inlet/outlet 80/60 and 60/45 C. This chart is used for approximate sizing. Accurate sizing by computer is available from Fläkt Woods on request. The charts are applicable to air with a density of 1. kg/m 3 (at t = 0 C). Air heater for low and normal temperature rises on the air side. Air flow, m 3 /h 4,5 4 1000 10 000 3000 4000 00 10 000 15 000 0 000 Size 0 1 30 31 3 40 33 41 4 51 53 4,5 4 Air velocity, m/s 3,5 3 3,5 3 Air velocity, m/s,5,5 0, 0,3 0,4 0,5 1 3 4 5 6 Air flow, m 3 /s Air velocity, m/s 4,5 4 3,5 3 Inlet air temperature, ti = 5 15 C Water temperature, tri/tru = 60/45 C tri/tru = 80/60 C A B C D A B C D 4,5 4 3,5 3 Air velocity, m/s,5,5 5 30 35 40 44 45 55 60 65 70 75 Outlet air temperature, tu C A = EUMD 0 B = EUMD 1, 30 C = EUMD, 31, 40 D = EUMD 3, 41, 4, 51, 53 Example: Given: Air flow 1.8 m 3 /s Inlet air temperature, ti 10 C Inlet water temperature, tri 60 C Outlet water temperature, tru 45 C Solution: Plot the air flow rate of 1.8 m 3 /s in the chart on this page. Select unit size 40. Follow the dashed lines in the charts on this page. Read the outlet air temperature tu = 44 C. Size of EUMD 0 1 30 31 3 33 40 41 4 51 53 Face area, m 0.110 0.164 0.4 0.46 0.336 0.46 0.51 0.448 0.56 0.68 0.70 0.85 1.15

DUOVENT EUMD AIR DISTRIBUTION SECTION, d = 0, 1 (ø 160) Page 106 Dimensions and s Rear side 5 300 5 x300 0 4x Insp. side = Cool = Warm Connection int. 30 30 3 ø160 ø00 177 Size 0 1 A A Connection ext. 5 x300 0 4x 7 5x 5 5x300 A1 30 5 A 30 5 x300 1 30 31 3 33 0 4x 7 5x 87 5x300 A1 30 5 A 30 5 3 50 3 50 x40 4 47 47 40 41 47 1000 930 4 A1 5 A 5 87 4x300 87 5x300 87 7x300 30 30 x300 H 370 187 1000 630 1000 930 1300 130 B 51 53 D C A1 c = 1, 5 400 d = 0, 1 A c = 5 10 5 D C 400 10 K G F Dimensions and s, see page 108. E 5 A1 c = 3 c = 4 d = 0

DUOVENT EUMD AIR DISTRIBUTION SECTION, d = (ø 00) Page 107 Dimensions and s Rear side 5 300 Insp.side 5 x300 5 3x300 = Cool = Warm Connection int. No ext. connection 37 300 37 330 ø00 07 Size 0 1 A A 5 x300 5 3x300 5 4x300 5 5x300 A1 37 5 A 300 37 5 300 330 07 30 31 3 33 5 3x300 5 4x300 87 5x300 A1 37 5 5 A 300 37 x300 330 07 40 41 1000 930 4 A1 5 A 5 87 4x300 87 5x300 87 7x300 37 300 37 x300 H 330 300 07 1000 630 1000 930 1300 130 B 51 53 A1 c = 1, 5 A c = 5 5 Right-hand inspection side Left-hand inspection side Hot water Steam Hot water Steam S T T S T T R P S V 77 U U S R P U U M X M 1 X M 1 M V 77 Dimensions and s, see page 108.

Page 108 DUOVENT EUMD AIR DISTRIBUTION SECTION Dimensions for page 106 Size A1 A B H C D E F G K M P R S T U V c=1 4 c=5 c=1 4 c=5 b=1, 3 b=5, 6 0 600 700 804 774 15 0 1 1 110 300 3 94 10 5 5 5 5 56 1 600 700 1104 774 15 800 1 1 110 300 3 94 10 5 5 5 5 56 600 700 1404 774 15 1100 1 1 110 300 3 94 10 5 5 3 5 59 30 700 700 1104 1074 15 800 15 00 35 400 144 10 3 3 3 5 359 31 700 700 1404 1074 15 1100 15 00 35 400 144 10 3 3 3 5 359 3 700 700 1704 1074 15 1400 15 00 35 400 144 10 3 3 3 5 359 33 700 700 004 1074 15 1700 15 00 35 400 144 10 3 3 3 5 359 40 600 700 1404 1374 15 1100 1 300 40 600 3 154 00 3 3 3 5 459 41 600 700 1704 1374 15 1400 1 300 40 600 3 154 00 3 3 5 459 4 600 700 004 1374 15 1700 1 300 40 600 3 154 00 3 3 5 459 600 700 1704 1674 15 1400 117 400 40 800 3 19 00 3 5 559 51 600 700 004 1674 15 1700 117 400 40 800 3 19 00 3 5 559 53 600 700 604 1674 30 000 117 400 40 800 3 19 00 3 5 559 X b=1, 3 b=5, 6 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 87 144 Dimensions for page 107 Size A1 A B H M P R S T U V X c=1 4 c=5 c=1 4 c=5 b=1, 3 b=5, 6 b=1, 3 b=5, 6 0 700 900 804 774 4 94 10 5 5 5 5 56 87 144 1 700 900 1104 774 4 94 10 5 5 5 5 56 87 144 700 900 1404 774 4 94 10 5 5 3 5 59 87 144 30 700 900 1104 1074 4 144 10 3 3 3 5 359 87 144 31 700 900 1404 1074 4 144 10 3 3 3 5 359 87 144 3 700 900 1704 1074 4 144 10 3 3 3 5 359 87 144 33 700 900 004 1074 4 144 10 3 3 3 5 359 87 144 40 800 1000 1404 1374 4 154 00 3 3 3 5 459 87 144 41 800 1000 1704 1374 4 154 00 3 3 5 459 87 144 4 800 1000 004 1374 4 154 00 3 3 5 459 87 144 800 1000 1704 1674 4 19 00 3 5 559 87 144 51 800 1000 004 1674 4 19 00 3 5 559 87 144 53 800 1000 604 1674 4 19 00 3 5 559 87 144 Weights for page 106 and 107 c=1 4 c=1 c=5 c=5 Size d=0, 1 d= d=0, 1 d= b=1 b=3 5 b=6 b=1 b=3 5 b=6 b=1 b=3 5 b=6 b=1 b=3 5 b=6 0 54 59 67 58 64 71 58 64 71 66 71 77 1 69 77 88 75 83 94 74 8 93 84 9 100 86 97 11 93 104 119 91 10 117 105 116 16 30 99 109 14 103 114 18 98 109 13 11 13 133 31 11 17 147 118 133 153 11 16 147 18 14 157 3 137 155 181 145 163 189 137 155 181 157 175 194 33 159 181 14 168 191 3 158 180 13 181 04 8 40 134 15 178 1 168 194 146 164 190 166 184 05 41 156 178 11 175 198 30 168 191 3 19 15 41 4 179 07 46 01 9 68 191 19 58 0 48 79 178 05 45 00 7 67 19 19 59 19 46 79 51 03 36 84 9 6 310 18 51 99 49 8 31 53 54 98 363 86 330 395 70 314 379 310 354 406

REGOVENT EUMR AIR DISTRIBUTION SECTION Page 109 Design The air distributor is intended for the REGOVENT system. It is provided with a specific number of branches on the end wall, roof or rear side, for connection to the MINIDUCT ducting system, (see page 115). The branches on end wall or roof can be provided with non-return smoke dampers to air tightness class T4. Actuator for non-return smoke dampers are to be dimensioned and delivered by Fläkt Woods. Min torque need: Nm/branch. The EUMR-aa-000-c air distribution section is intended for special duct connections on site. Specification Air distribution REGOVENT system EUMR-aa-bbb-c-d Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 MINIDUCT-connections (bbb) bbb End wall Roof Rear side without 0 0 0 with 1 1 1 Non-return smoke damper (c) 0 = without MINIDUCT (ø 160) 1 = with (not on rear side) MINIDUCT (ø 160) inside = with (not on rear side) MINIDUCT (ø 00) inside Inspection side (d) 1 = right-hand = left-hand

REGOVENT EUMR AIR DISTRIBUTION SECTION, c = 0, 1 (ø 160) Page 110 Dimensions and s Insp. side 5 300 Rear side 5 x300 0 4x Connection int. 300 37 Size 0 1 5 x300 0 4x 7 5x A 300 ø160 ø00 37 A 5 5x300 Connection ext. x300 x300 37 30 31 3 33 37 0 4x 7 5x 87 5x300 3x300 x300 37 40 41 1000 930 87 4x300 87 5x300 87 7x300 4 387 H 4x300 3x300 37 387 1000 630 B 1000 930 1300 130 51 53 30 0 Size B H A1 Weight, A Weight, kg kg 0 804 774 300 4 400 3 1 1104 774 300 30 400 41 1404 774 300 37 400 30 1104 1074 300 41 400 56 31 1404 1074 300 47 400 64 3 1704 1074 300 58 400 78 33 004 1074 300 66 400 89 40 1404 1374 300 60 400 80 41 1704 1374 300 69 400 93 4 004 1374 300 79 400 106 1704 1674 300 81 400 108 51 004 1674 300 9 400 14 53 604 1674 300 115 400 154 ø 00 mm connection branches Right-hand side shown 5 A c = 1 5 A1 c = 0

REGOVENT EUMR AIR DISTRIBUTION SECTION, c = (ø 00) Page 111 Dimensions and s 5 300 Insp. side Rear side 5 x300 5 3x300 Connection int. No ext. connection Size 0 1 5 x300 5 3x300 5 4x300 A 300 ø00 37 5 5x300 A x300 30 31 3 33 37 5 3x300 5 4x300 87 5x300 3x300 40 41 1000 930 87 4x300 87 5x300 87 7x300 4 37 H 4x300 37 1000 630 Size B H Weight, kg 0 804 774 35 1 1104 774 44 1404 774 53 30 1104 1074 60 31 1404 1074 67 3 1704 1074 8 33 004 1074 93 40 1404 1374 84 41 1704 1374 97 4 004 1374 110 1704 1674 11 51 004 1674 17 53 604 1674 156 B 1000 930 1300 130 51 53 37 5 0

EUMO EXHAUST AIR SECTION Page 11 Design The exhaust air section is designed for exhaust air systems (of the high-velocity type). The section is provided with a number of branches on the end wall, roof or rear side, for connection to the MINIDUCT ducting system. The branches on end wall or roof can be provided with non-return smoke dampers to air tightness class T4. Actuator for non-return smoke dampers are to be dimensioned and delivered by Fläkt Woods. Min torque need: Nm/branch. Specification Exhaust air section EUMO-aa-bbb-c-d Size (aa) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 MINIDUCT-connections (bbb) bbb End wall Roof Rear side without 0 0 0 with 1 1 1 Non-return smoke damper (c) 0 = without MINIDUCT (ø 160) = with (not on rear side) MINIDUCT ø 00 inside Inspection side (d) 1 = right-hand = left-hand

EUMO EXHAUST AIR SECTION, c = 0, (ø 00) Page 113 Dimensions and s Rear side 5 300 Insp. side 5 x300 5 3x300 Connection int. No ext. connection 300 37 Size 0 1 5 x300 5 3x300 5 4x300 A 300 ø00 37 A 5 5x300 x300 x300 37 30 31 3 33 37 5 3x300 5 4x300 87 5x300 3x300 37 40 41 1000 930 87 4x300 87 5x300 87 7x300 4 H 4x300 37 1000 630 B 1000 930 1300 130 51 53 7 37 Size B H A1 Weight, Weight, A kg kg 0 804 774 400 8 0 35 1 1104 774 400 35 0 44 1404 774 400 43 0 53 30 1104 1074 400 48 0 60 31 1404 1074 400 54 0 67 3 1704 1074 400 66 0 8 33 004 1074 400 75 0 93 40 1404 1374 400 68 0 84 41 1704 1374 400 79 0 97 4 004 1374 400 89 0 110 1704 1674 400 91 0 11 51 004 1674 400 103 0 17 53 604 1674 400 18 0 156 ø 00 mm connection branches Left-hand side shown A1 5 A c = 0 c = 5

EUVH JOINTING FRAME Page 114 Design Used for jointing unit section of different sizes, without adding to the overall length of the unit. Sealing strips are supplied. The frame is fitted to the bigger size of unit block. Specification Jointing frame between sizes EUVH-aa-bb-c-d-e (Mounted on the larger size of unit block) Size (aa - bb) aa bb aa bb larger smaller size larger smaller size (c =1, ) (c = 3, 4) 30 1 1 0 31 1 40 31 31 30 41 3 3 31 4 33 33 3 41 41 40 51 4 4 41 51 53 51 Location (c) 1 = at top = at bottom 3 = left side in air stream direction 1) 4 = right side in air stream direction 1) c = 1 c = c = 3 c = 4 Panel material (d) 1 = 0.7 mm thick galv. sheet steel = 1 mm thick galv. sheet steel 5 = 0.7 mm thick stainless steel 333 (AISI 304) 7 = 0.7 mm thick stainless steel 343 (AISI 316) Frame: stainless steel 333 (AISI 304) 8 = 1 mm thick stainless steel 343 (AISI 316) Frame: stainless steel 333 (AISI 304) OFF-SHORE

Page 115 EUVH JOINTING FRAME BETWEEN MODULES OF DIFFERENT SIZES Dimensions and s c=1 c=3 300 B B A 300 A c= c=4 B B 300 A A 300 aa bb A B Weight, kg 30 1 1104 774 5 31 1404 774 6.5 40 31 1404 1074 6.5 41 3 1704 1074 8 4 33 004 1074 9.5 41 1704 1374 8 51 4 004 1374 9.5 aa bb A B C Weight, kg 1 0 804 774 300 3.5 1 1104 774 300 3.5 31 30 1104 1074 300 5 3 31 1404 1074 300 5 33 3 1704 1074 300 5 41 40 1404 1374 300 6.5 4 41 1704 1374 300 6.5 51 1704 1674 300 8 53 51 004 1674 600 16

EUAZ-01 inspection window ACCESSORIES EUAZ-04 base frame Page 116 194 mm dia. Can be factory-fitted to the unit sections tabulated below. Unit section Quantity EUPB bag filter 1 EUQA humidifier 1 EUL(B,F) fan 1 EUTC empty section 1 EUMF energy recovery unit 1 EUV(B,C,D) mixing section 1 Specification This extra base frame is used when the unit sections or blocks are to be mounted on a common base frame or if space must be provided for accommodating a water trap, for instance. The base frame must be used when EUM(N,P) or EUQA is included in the unit. The base frame is provided with holes for lifting tubes, and for securing it to the deck. Inspection window EUAZ-01-b Variant (b) 1 = standard = double glass EUAZ-0 lifting device Specification Base frame EUAZ-04-bb-ccc-d-e-f MAX. 10 kg EUAZ-0 MAX. 30 Unit size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Length (ccc) cm = of the block or total length of unit (bbb) The lifting lugs are designed for fitting to the upper corner piece for lifting separate unit blocks. Max. permissible load: 10 kg Specification Lifting device (single block) 1 = for unit sizes 0 53 EUAZ-0-1 Height (d) 1 = 1 mm, e = 1, 3, f = 1, 3 3 = 00 mm, e = 4, f = 4 Version (e) 1 = factory-fitted to a single-level unit 3 = factory-fitted to a stacked unit 4 = factory-fitted to a stacked OFF-SHORE unit Material (f) 1 = galvanized 3 = painted, optional colour 4 = stainless steel 343 (AISI 316), OFF-SHORE unit

Dimensions and s EUAZ-04 BASE FRAME Page 117 0 B =1/300 10 ø 9 10 30 30 9 58 A B 58 0 L(ccc) L (ccc) = 00 mm min. 9600 mm max. In increments of 100 mm 1) Existing holes for L = 00 900 mm ) Existing holes for L = 1000 3600 mm 3) Holes for adjustable feet. Particulars concerning the arrangement of other feet are available on request. adjustable feet are necessary for L = 00 400 mm 4 adjustable feet are necessary for L = 0 000 mm 6 adjustable feet are necessary for L = 100 4000 mm 8 adjustable feet are necessary for L = 4100 6000 mm 10 adjustable feet are necessary for L = 6100 70 mm 1 adjustable feet are necessary for L = 7600 9600 mm Size A 0 774 1,30 1074,31,40 1374 3,41, 1674 33,4,51 1974 53 574 Weight, kg, of EUAZ 04 bb ccc 1 e 300 Gewicht, Weight, kg kg 00 1 100 bb=53 4,51 3,41,,31,40 1,30 0 060 180 300 40 540 660 780 900 10 40 360 480 600 70 840 960 Telibez. Code suffix ccc, cm ccc, cm

Page 118 ACCESSORIES EUAZ-06 lifting tube, set EUAZ-08 water trap Size L 0 1000 1,30 1300,31,40 1600 3,41, 1900 33,4,51 00 53 800 ø75 L ø3 ext. 00 Used for lifting unit mounted on the EUAZ-04 base frame. Delivered in pairs. For draining the condensate from air coolers or humidifiers. Intended for negative pressure of 800 Pa. Specification Specification Lifting tube, set EUAZ-06-bb Water trap EUAZ-08 Unit size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 EUAZ-09 bulkhead light EUAZ-07 lifting spreader, set Size L 0 1000 1,30 1300,31,40 1600 3,41, 1900 33,4,51 00 53 800 Specification L Bulkhead light Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Specification EUAZ-09-bb- Lifting spreader, set Unit size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 EUAZ-07-bb Type (c) = without cable and switch

EUAZ-11 damper actuator ACCESSORIES EUAZ-13 threaded flange Page 119 ø1...18* 9...16 n G dia. holes 49 5 80 ød øe øf Specification Damper actuator EUAZ-11-bb Actuator size (b) 01 = 4V 15 Nm, on/off 0 = 30V 15 Nm, on/off 03 = 4V 30 Nm, on/off 04 = 30V 30 Nm, on/off 05 = 4V 15 Nm, on/off, spring return 06 = 30V 15 Nm, on/off, spring return 07 = 4V 15 Nm, modulating 08 = 4V 30 Nm, modulating 09 = 4V 10 Nm, modulating, spring return 10 = Actuator supplied by customer. H Nom. EUAZ-13 pipe size D E G n F H J Wgt., mm kg 15 95 65 14 4 1/ 15 0 0.6 5 115 85 14 4 1 16 1 1.3 3 140 100 18 4 1 1/4 16 1.0 165 15 18 4 18 3 3.0 80 00 160 18 8 3 0 6 4.3 J For connection on the water, steam or condensate side. The flanges conform to Swedish Standard SMS 035 (DIN 635) and are used for connecting the piping to the heat exchanger. Specification Threaded flange EUAZ-13-b-c- (fitted and soldered for single pipe joint) Size (b) 0 = 15 1 = 5 = 3 4 = 5 = 80 6 = 100 Condition on delivery (c) 0 = flange, delivered separately 1 = flange, delivered separately + counterflange = flange, assembled 3 = flange, assembled + counterflange Material (d) = bronze

EUAZ-18 manual air purging valve ACCESSORIES EUAZ-19 automatic air purging valve Page 10 3/8" BSP male threads Specification Manual air purging valve EUAZ-18 [for up to 115 C and 1.1 MPa (aa atg)] The valve should be installed with the body vertical and the top of the valve pointing upwards. As the body gradually fills with water, the float will rise and the valve will close. The valve will be fully closed when the water level has risen to two-thirds of the body height. Since the water level never reaches the valve seat, the risk of leakage due to impurities in the water is eliminated. As air is accumulated in the valve body, the float will move down and the valve will open, thus allowing the air to escape. The valve is fitted with a cap. If the valve should start to leak due to fouling, tighten the cap to prevent water leakage, until an opportunity has arisen for replacing the valve. The cap should be backed off 3 turns when the valve is in normal operation. The float housing of the valve is provided with a removable cover to allow for cleaning. The valve seat will not be damaged by high water temperatures or by anti-freeze additive contained in the water. Installation Connect the valve to the vent tapping of the heat exchanger by means of the EUAZ-0 nipple, to which an anti-freeze thermostat can also be connected. Anti-freeze thermostat Landis & Gyr QAE 1.91 Anti-freeze thermostat Specification Automatic air purging valve EUAZ-19

EUAZ-0 nipple ACCESSORIES EUAZ-1 expansion valve Page 11 The nipple is used for connecting the EUAZ-19 automatic air purging valve or a drain valve to the heat exchanger. Specification The tables on the following pages specifies a suitable working range for each valve size. When selecting the expansion valve, the smallest size should be specified to ensure satisfactory control. Nipple EUAZ-0 EUAZ-19 air purging valve EUAZ-0 nipple

ACCESSOIRES Page 1 Specification Expansion valve EUAZ-1-37-00/45 EUAZ- 1-37 EUAZ- 1-37 R Nominal capacity, ALCO designation Connection kw Type Code Nozzle Casing Thermal section Internal External 00 TCLE NW 100 X 440-B1B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 004 4 TCLE 100 NW 100 X 440-BB C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 009 8 TCLE 00 NW 100 X 440-B3B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 013 1 TCLE 300 NW 100 X 440-B3, 5B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 019 17 TCLE 400 NW 100 X 440-B4B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 04 TCLE 5 NW 100 X 440-B5B C 1-7 mm XB1019 NW1B 1/ x 5/8 033 30 TCLE 7 NW 100 X 440-B6 C 1-7 mm 1/ x 5/8 044 41 TCLE 1000 NW 100 X 440-B7B A 576 mm 5/8 x 7/8 7/8 x 1 1/8 05 48 TCLE 11 NW 100 X 440-B8B A 576 mm 5/8 x 7/8 7/8 x 1 1/8 06 58 TJRE 14 NW 100 X 11873-B4B 10331 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 075 69 TJRE 17 NW 100 X 11873-B5B 10331 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 094 87 TERE 1 NW 100 X 9117-B6B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 111 10 TERE 5 NW 100 X 9117-B7B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 149 138 TERE 33 NW 100 X 9117-B8B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 191 177 TERE 4 NW 100 X 9117-B9B 9153 XC76NWB 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 34 16 TIRE 5 NW 100 X 9166-B10B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 319 95 THRE 71 NW 100 X 9144-B11B 9149 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 45 393 THRE 94 NW 100 X 9144-B13B 9149 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 R407C Nominal capacity, ALCO designation Connection kw Type Code Nozzle Casing Thermal section Internal External 00 TCLE NW 100 X 440-B1B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 004 4 TCLE 100 NW 100 X 440-BB C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 009 9 TCLE 00 NW 100 X 440-B3B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 013 13 TCLE 300 NW 100 X 440-B3, 5B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 019 19 TCLE 400 NW 100 X 440-B4B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 04 4 TCLE 5 NW 100 X 440-B5B C 1-7 mm XB1019 NW1B 1/ x 5/8 033 33 TCLE 7 NW 100 X 440-B6 C 1-7 mm 1/ x 5/8 044 44 TCLE 1000 NW 100 X 440-B7B A 576 mm 5/8 x 7/8 7/8 x 1 1/8 05 5 TCLE 11 NW 100 X 440-B8B A 576 mm 5/8 x 7/8 7/8 x 1 1/8 06 6 TJRE 14 NW 100 X 11873-B4B 10331 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 075 75 TJRE 17 NW 100 X 11873-B5B 10331 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 094 94 TERE 1 NW 100 X 9117-B6B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 111 111 TERE 5 NW 100 X 9117-B7B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 149 149 TERE 33 NW 100 X 9117-B8B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 191 191 TERE 4 NW 100 X 9117-B9B 9153 XC76NWB 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 34 34 TIRE 5 NW 100 X 9166-B10B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 319 319 THRE 71 NW 100 X 9144-B11B 9149 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 45 45 THRE 94 NW 100 X 9144-B13B 9149 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8

ACCESSORIES Page 13 Specification Expansion valve EUAZ-1-36-00/80 EUAZ- 1-38 EUAZ- 1-36 R134a Nominal capacity, ALCO designation Connection kw Type Code Nozzle Casing Thermal section Internal External 00 1,5 TCLE 5 MW 55 X 440-B1B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 003 3 TCLE 75 MW 55 X 440-BB C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 006 6 TCLE 1 MW 55 X 440-B3B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 009 9 TCLE 00 MW 55 X 440-B3, 5B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 014 14 TCLE MW 55 X 440-B4B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 017 17 TCLE 3 MW 55 X 440-B5B C 1-7 mm XB1019 MW1B 1/ x 5/8 04 4 TCLE 55 MW 55 X 440-B6 C 1-7 mm 1/ x 5/8 03 3 TCLE 7 MW 55 X 440-B7B A 576 mm 5/8 x 7/8 7/8 x 1 1/8 037 37 TCLE 900 MW 55 X 440-B8B A 576 mm 5/8 x 7/8 7/8 x 1 1/8 045 45 TJRE 11 MW 55 X 11873-B4B 10331 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 053 53 TJRE 13 MW 55 X 11873-B5B 10331 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 066 66 TERE 16 MW 55 X 9117-B6B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 076 76 TERE 19 MW 55 X 9117-B7B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 10 10 TERE 5 MW 55 X 9117-B8B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 18 18 TERE 31 MW 55 X 9117-B9B 9153 XC76MWB 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 179 179 TIRE 45 MW 55 X 9166-B10B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 30 30 THRE 55 MW 55 X 9144-B11B 9149 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 80 80 THRE 68 MW 55 X 9144-B13B 9149 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 Expansion valve EUAZ-1-38-00/80 R404A (ej MOP) Nominal capacity, ALCO designation Connection kw Type Code Nozzle Casing Thermal section Internal External 00 1.5 TCLE 5 SW X 440-B1B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 003.5 TCLE 75 SW X 440-BB C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 006 6 TCLE 1 SW X 440-B3B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 008 8 TCLE 00 SW X 440-B3, 5B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 01 1 TCLE SW X 440-B4B C 1-5 mm 3/8 x 5/8 016 16 TCLE 400 SW X 440-B5B C 1-7 mm XB1019 SW1B 1/ x 5/8 0 TCLE 600 SW X 440-B6 C 1-7 mm 1/ x 5/8 09 9 TCLE 8 SW X 440-B7B A 576 mm 5/8 x 7/8 7/8 x 1 1/8 034 34 TCLE 1000 SW X 440-B8B A 576 mm 5/8 x 7/8 7/8 x 1 1/8 043 43 TJRE 1 SW X 11873-B4B 10331 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 051 51 TJRE 14 SW X 11873-B5B 10331 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 063 63 TERE 18 SW X 9117-B6B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 07 7 TERE 0 SW X 9117-B7B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 095 95 TERE 7 SW X 9117-B8B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 1 1 TERE 34 SW X 9117-B9B 9153 XC76SWB 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 167 167 TIRE 47 SW X 9166-B10B 9153 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 17 17 THRE 61 SW X 9144-B11B 9149 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8 7 7 THRE 77 SW X9144-B13B 9149 7/8 x 7/8 1 1/8 x 1 1/8

ACCESSORIES Page 14 Shrink-film packaging Unit size (bb) (lower unit when double-stacked) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Length cm (ccc) 030 990 (min. max. intervals of 10 cm) EUAZ--bb-ccc-d EUPZ-01 Filter cassette, for EUPA, set EUPZ-0 Filter mat. for EUPA, set EUPZ-03 Filter, for EUPB, set EUPZ-04 Filter, for EUPC, set Specification see page 34, 35 EUPZ-07 manometer Unit type (d) 1 = single unit, horizontal installation 3 = double-stacked unit, horizontal installation Earthing cable (flexible duct connection) EUAZ-3 Specification Manometer EUPZ-07 EUPZ-08 filter monitor For remote indication that the pressure drop across the filter has exceeded the preset value ( Pa). Mounting and connection components are supplied. Specification Filter monitor EUPZ-08 Differential pressure gauge (type Dwyer Magnahelic) EUPZ-17

Page 15 ACCESSORIES EUVZ-01 lever actuator for damper sections OPEN CLOSE The lever actuator consists of a steel lever with a rubber handle, a moulded plastic locking knob and a sheet steel segment. The actuator is electrogalvanised. Self-adhesive labels marked OPEN, CLOSED, OUT- DOOR AIR, RECIRCULATED AIR and MIXING are available in English, German and French. Lever actuator Specification EUVZ-01 EUVZ-0 Flexible connection EUVZ-03 Connection piece EUVZ-04 Counterflange EUVZ-05 Protective screen Size 15 B Total Half Two inlets B H B H B H 0 0 0 0 400 0 00 1 800 0 800 300 800 00 1100 0 1100 300 1100 00 30 800 800 800 400 800 400 31 1100 800 1100 0 1100 400 33 1700 800 1700 400 1700 400 3 1400 800 1400 400 1400 400 40 1100 1000 1100 600 1100 400 41 1400 1000 1400 600 1400 400 4 1700 1000 1700 600 1700 400 1400 100 1400 800 1400 600 51 1700 100 1700 800 1700 600 53 000 1400 000 800 000 600 H Specification Flexible connection Duct connection piece Counterflange (d = and 4) Protective screen EUVZ-0-bb-c-d EUVZ-03-bb-c-d EUVZ-04-bb-c-d EUVZ-05-bb-c-d Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Connection dimension (c) 1 = whole for EUVA EUVB (b = 1) = half for EUVB (b = 3 5) EUVC (bb = 0 14) 4 = double front for EUVC (bb = 01) Connection type (d) 1 = PG joint, galvanized sheet steel, not for EUVZ-04 = Flange connection, galvanized sheet steel 3 = PG joint, stainless steel, not for EUVZ-04 4 = Flange connection, stainless steel

ACCESSORIES Page 16 Flexible connection, outlet Duct connection piece, outlet Counterflange, outlet Protective screen, outlet EULZ-01-bb-c-d EULZ-0-bb-c-d EULZ-03-bb-c-d EULZ-04-bb-c Spare belts, set for EULT (ordered with EULT) Spare belts, set for EULV (ordered with EULV) EULZ-10 EULZ-11 H 15 B Outlet fan size Size 3 mm mm 0 300 400 1 400 0 0 0 30 0 0 31 600 600 3 600 800 33 800 40 600 800 41 800 800 4 800 1000 800 1000 51 1000 1000 53 1000 100 Specification Flexible connection, outlet Duct connection piece, outlet Counterflange, outlet Protective screen, outlet EULZ-01-bb-c-d EULZ-0-bb-c-d EULZ-03-bb-c-d EULZ-04-bb-c-d Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Fan size (c) 3 Connection (d) 1 = PG-joint, galv. sheet steel (not for EULZ-03) = flange connection, galvanized sheet steel 3 = PG-joint, stainless steel (not for EULZ-03) 4 = flange connection, stainless steel

EULZ-13 air distributor L ACCESSORIES EULZ-14 air diffusor L 1 Without air distributor, To ducting Page 17 With air distributor, To another functional section L Recommended Recommended Recommended Unit size Weight, minimum overall length Weight, minimum overall length Weight, minimum overall length L L 1 L Fan size kg of downstream empty kg of downstream empty kg of downstream empty section section section 0-130 300 00 4 300 310 5 0 0-3 130 300 10 4 300 30 5 0 1-00 3 300 45 5 400 45 5 600 1-3 130 3 300 60 6 400 370 8 0-00 3 300 60 6 400 440 8 600-3 00 3 300 180 6 400 360 8 0 30-00 3 300 60 6 400 440 8 600 30-3 00 4 300 30 6 400 470 8 600 31-00 4 300 30 8 400 490 10 600 31-3 180 5 300 415 10 0 565 13 700 3-30 5 400 415 10 0 615 13 800 3-3 00 5 300 440 1 0 610 16 800 33-00 5 300 40-30 5 400 415 10 0 615 13 800 40-3 00 5 300 440 1 0 610 16 800 41-5 400 440 1 0 6 16 800 41-3 00 7 300 55 14 700 695 19 900 4-300 7 400 55 14 700 795 19 1000 4-3 7 400 515 14 700 735 19 900-300 7 400 55 14 700 795 19 1000-3 7 400 515 14 700 735 19 900 51-300 7 400 515 14 700 785 19 1000 51-3 8 400 645 16 800 865 1000 53-3 9 0 645 16 800 965 1100 53-3 300 8 400 755 18 900 105 5 100 1) Can be used together with the EUM(R,D) without empty section. Specification Specification Air distributor EULZ-13-bb-c-d Diffusor for EUL(B,F) EULZ-14-bb-c-d-e Unit size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Fan size (c), 3 Fan size (c), 3 Material (d) 1 = galvanized = stainless steel Air distributor (d) 0 = without 1 = with Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless steel

Bolt holes in flanges ACCESSORIES Page 18 End connection frame Fexible connection Connection piece Protective screen 0 A D n 1 x 00 ø11,5 D C n x 00 Counterflange 17 A+6 D n 1 x 00 ø11,5 D C n x 00 35 C 30 C 35 B 0 30 B+6 17 A B C D n n1 00 00 10 10 145 145 300 300 170 170 400 00 10 10 1 400 400 10 10 1 1 0 00 170 10 1 0 300 170 170 1 0 400 170 10 1 0 0 170 170 1 1 600 00 10 10 600 400 10 10 1 600 0 10 170 1 600 600 10 10 800 00 10 10 3 800 300 10 170 3 800 400 10 10 3 1 800 0 10 170 3 1 800 600 10 10 3 800 800 10 10 3 3 1000 1000 10 10 4 4 1100 00 170 10 4 1100 300 170 170 4 1100 400 170 10 4 1 1100 0 170 170 4 1 1100 600 170 10 4 1100 800 170 10 4 3 1100 1000 170 10 4 4 100 00 10 10 5 100 400 10 10 5 1 100 0 10 170 5 1 100 600 10 10 5 100 700 10 170 5 100 800 10 10 5 3 100 1000 10 10 5 4 100 100 10 10 5 5 1400 00 10 10 6-1400 400 10 10 6 1 1400 600 10 10 6 1400 800 10 10 6 3 1400 1000 10 10 6 4 1400 1100 10 170 6 4 1400 100 10 10 6 5 1400 1400 10 10 6 6 1600 00 10 10 7-1600 300 10 170 7-1600 400 10 10 7 1 1600 0 10 170 7 1 1600 600 10 10 7 1600 700 10 170 7 1600 800 10 10 7 3 1600 100 10 10 7 5 1600 1400 10 10 7 6 1600 1600 10 10 7 7 A B C D n n1 1700 00 170 10 7-1700 400 170 10 7 1 1700 600 170 10 7 1700 800 170 10 7 3 1700 1000 170 10 7 4 1700 100 170 10 7 5 1700 1400 170 10 7 6 1800 400 10 10 8 1 1800 0 10 170 8 1 1800 600 10 10 8 1800 700 10 170 8 1800 800 10 10 8 3 1800 100 10 10 8 5 1800 1400 10 10 8 6 1800 1600 10 10 8 7 1800 1800 10 10 8 8 000 00 10 10 9-000 400 10 10 9 1 000 600 10 10 9 000 700 10 170 9 000 800 10 10 9 3 000 1000 10 10 9 4 000 1400 10 10 9 6 000 000 10 10 9 9 00 1600 10 10 10 7 00 1800 10 10 10 8 00 000 10 10 10 9 800 00 10 10 13-800 300 10 170 13-800 400 10 10 13 1 800 0 10 170 13 1 800 600 10 10 13 800 700 10 170 13 800 800 10 10 13 3 800 1000 10 10 13 4 800 1600 10 10 13 7 800 1800 10 10 13 8 800 000 10 10 13 9 3400 00 10 10 16-3400 300 10 170 16-3400 400 10 10 16 1 3400 0 10 170 16 1 3400 600 10 10 16 3400 700 10 170 16 3400 800 10 10 16 3 3400 1000 10 10 16 4 3400 000 10 10 16 9

ACCESSORIES Page 19 EULZ-4 screen protection door EULZ-5 telpher beam Inside the normal inspection door. Specification Specification Screen protection door (For EUL(B,F) EULZ-4-bb-c Telpher Beam (for motor replacement) EULZ-5-bb-c-3-e Size (bb) 0, 1, 30, 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Material (c) 1 = galvanized = stainless steel Size (bb), 31, 3, 33 40, 41, 4, 51, 53 Fan size (c) 3 Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless EULZ-6 Earthing cable (fan to casing) Specification Earthing cable (Fan to casing) EULZ-6

INSTALLATION Page 130 Handling An air conditioning unit is normally delivered with the sections assembled as a complete unit, mounted on EUAZ-04 base frame. Units including an air cooler must always be mounted on EUAZ-04 base frame, in order that the drain pipe has the necessary slope from the drip tray to the EUAZ-08 water trap. Lifting tubes must be used for lifting the unit. Holes are provided in the common base frame for lifting tubes. Water trap EUAZ-08 Units with an air cooler or a humidifier require a min. of 160 mm mounting stand height to accommodate a water trap. 1 90 Min. 160 EUQA Humidifier Drip tray Drain pipe Water trap EUAZ-08 EUM(N,P) Air cooler Drip tray 1 1) Min. 160 Drain pipe Water trap EUAZ-08 Installation Air conditioning units should be installed to facilitate inspection and service and for this, a 7 mm access space is required at the inspection side of the unit. Longer units are in some cases delivered in two parts and are to be joined at the erection site. Each part must be mounted on mounting stands see fig. If ducts are connected to the bottom of the unit, they must be supported by hangers, so that their will not be applied to the bottom of the unit. Any connected pipes should be supported in the same way. 1) Applicable to EUAZ-08 water trap fitted to unit section subjected to internal vacuum. If the air cooler is situated downstream of the fan, a goose-neck type water trap must be used. The min. mounting stand height should then be about 3 mm. Water trap EUAZ-08 Min. 160 Max. 10 Max. 10

Page 131 INSTALLATION EXAMPLES Alternative duct connections for the EUL(B,F) fan Outlet upwards A number of common unit arrangements are shown in this section. Unless otherwise stated, the units are shown viewed from the side. Outlet forward Inlet Outlet downwards Horizontal installation 1 3 Select the duct connection accessories or connect collared ducts directly to the fan section. The EUVC mixing section allows for a number of connection alternatives. A unit section, such as an air heater or air cooler arranged immediately downstream of the fan should be preceded by an EUTC empty section and the fan outlet should be fitted with an EULZ-13 air distributor. 4 5 EUVB mixing section EULZ-13 air distributor EUTC empty section Water trap for positive pressure Extra space must be provided below the unit for accommodating the EUAZ-08 water trap for the air cooler and humidifier, see page 19.

REGOTERM EUMF RECOVERY UNIT Page 13 Systems: Cabins (high velocity) DUOVENT System with air heater and air cooler 6 Recovery unit EUMF Bag filter EUP(B,C) Air distribution section EUMD DUOVENT REGOVENT System with air heater and air cooler 7 Recovery unit EUMF Bag filter EUP(B,C) Air distribution section EUMR REGOVENT Bag filter EUPC Bag filter EUPC Caution: Air recirculation is not suitable if the recirculated air contains exhaust air from sanitary spaces. System: Public Spaces (low velocity) Without air recirculation system with air heater and air cooler 8 Recovery unit EUMF Bag filter EUP(B,C) Air distribution section EUMR REGOVENT Bag filter EUPC Air renewal system 9 Recovery unit EUMF Bag filter EUP(B,C) Bag filter EUPC

REGOTERM EUMF RECOVERY UNIT Page 133 Inspection facilities In order to facilitate inspection of the rotor and any service work that may be required, adjacent unit sections should be equipped with inspection covers. Inspection can normally be carried out from a filter, fan or other unit section. The rotor can also be inspected from its own inspection cover. For periodic service and possible bearing replacement, sufficient space must be available for withdrawing the rotor. Inspection and service space Size 0-1 30-31 3-33 40-41 4-51 53 L 800 900 1000 1100 100 1300 1400 1600 Combination of two sizes EUVH jointing frame Used for connecting unit sections of different sizes, without adding to the overall length of the unit. 10 Location of the jointing frame at the transition between sizes 30-1, 31-, 40-31, 41-3, 4 33, -41, 51-4. Location of the jointing frame at the transition between sizes 1-0, -1, 31-30, 3-31, 33 3, 41-40, 4-41, 51-, 53-51. The EUTC empty section is 300 mm long. EUVH jointing frame Filters In order to prevent fouling and clogging of the rotor, filters should always be installed in the supply and exhaust air sections upstream of the rotor. The filter in the supply air should be of type EU 5 (F 45). In the exhaust air EU 3 (G 85) is normally used. EUPA pleated 1) filter L Exhaust Frånluft air The EUTC section is used as a suction box. A EUTC empty section, at least 300 mm long, is used at the transition between sections. 11 EUVH jointing frame The EUTC empty section is used here as a distribution chamber and suction chamber, together with the EUVH jointing frame. 13 Outdoor Uteluft air Supply Tilluft air Grille ) EUPB bag filter EUVH jointing frame A support stand is necessary. The unit is viewed from the side.

PRESSURE DROP The area shaded pale grey indicates that the air velocity is 3 m/s normal face area or above and that there is consequently risk of water entrainment if condensation occurs in the air cooler. If the air cooler is completely wet, the pressure drop will increase by 35%. Page 134 Recommended maximum pressure drop increase from the design pressure drop for the EUP(A, B, C, D) filter. Filter class EU 3 (G 85) EU 4 (G 90) EU 5 (F 45) EU 6 (F 65) Pressure drop increase, Pa 65 75

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 0 Page 135 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1.4 1800 50 340 3960 4680 40 Pressure drop p, Pa End connection frame EUVA With damper 0 5 5 10 15 15 Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, 0 5 5 10 15 15 (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 5 5 10 0 5 30 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 10 15 5 35 60 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 0 5 5 10 15 15 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 5 5 10 0 5 35 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 5 10 0 5 40 45 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 5 10 0 30 40 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper 30 60 95 Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable 80 100 10 145 170 180 EU3, G85, disposible 75 90 105 10 135 145 Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 60 70 85 105 135 1 EU4, G90 60 70 85 105 135 1 EU5, F45 95 15 155 195 35 55 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 65 70 80 85 95 100 EU5, F45 90 105 15 145 165 180 EU6, F65 110 15 1 175 00 15 Filter / Coalescor EUPD 90 10 145 190 30 Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 10 15 5 35 45 55 10 0 30 40 55 3 15 30 45 60 80 90 4 0 35 55 75 100 115 5 5 45 70 100 130 1 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 10 0 30 40 55 60 0 35 55 80 105 10 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 15 5 35 65 75 EUMK: Low temperature, 0 40 60 80 110 10 Finned coil 3 30 55 80 115 1 170 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 40 70 105 145 195 0 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 35 60 95 130 175 00 06 Pressure drop p 1 90 140 195 60 95 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 70 15 185 60 345 395 3 m/s at 1.04 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 1.3 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.755 x p 85 155 35 35 435 490 4 m/s at 1.40 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 1.60 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator 10 0 30 70 85 Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage 35 60 95 130 175 00 evaporative refrigerant 06 DX 1 or -stage 90 140 195 60 95 08 DX 1 or -stage 70 15 185 60 345 395 Normal face area: 10 DX 1 or -stage 85 155 35 35 435 490 3 m/s at 1.04 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 1.40 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator 10 0 30 70 85 REGOTERM EUMF 45 60 80 95 115 15 Humidifier EUMQ Glass fibre 85% 55 115 190 - - - 60% 40 85 140 - - - Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 10 0 30 45 65 75 3 5 15 0 30 45 55 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size -0-40 -65-95 -130-155 3-10 -5-40 -60-85 -100 With air distributor, fan size -15-30 -45-70 -95-110 3-10 -0-30 -45-60 -70 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s 0. 0.5 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h 70 900 1080 160 1440 160 Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 60 90 10 155 195 35 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 95 135 180 35 90 355 Air heater, steam b =, 4 0 5 35 45 60 70 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s 6 8 10 1 14 16 Pressure drop, Pa 0 35 60 90 15 160 REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s 6 8 10 1 14 16 Pressure drop, Pa 0 35 60 90 15 160 Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 0 0 5 5 10 0

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 1 Page 136 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Damper, inlet grille Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 1.56 m 3/ s 3 m/s at 1.75 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.84 x p 4 m/s at.10 m 3 /s 4 m/s at.30 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX 1 or -stage 08 DX 1 or -stage Normal face area: 10 DX 1 or -stage 3 m/s at 1.56 m 3 /s 4 m/s at.10 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 1.0 1. 1.4 1.6 1.8.0.1 3600 430 40 5760 6480 700 7560 Pressure drop p, Pa 5 5 5 10 10 15 15 10 15 5 30 40 45 5 5 5 10 10 15 15 10 15 0 5 35 40 45 5 10 10 15 15 0 5 10 15 0 5 35 40 45 15 5 30 40 65 70 15 5 35 45 55 70 75 65 90 115 95 110 15 140 155 170 180 90 100 110 10 130 140 145 70 75 90 100 10 140 1 70 75 90 100 10 140 1 10 140 160 185 15 40 55 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 115 130 140 155 170 180 15 140 155 170 185 05 15 115 135 155 180 10 35 15 0 5 35 40 55 15 5 30 35 45 55 60 5 35 45 60 70 85 90 35 45 60 75 90 105 115 45 60 75 95 115 140 1 0 5 35 40 60 65 35 65 80 100 10 130 0 5 35 45 55 65 70 30 45 55 70 90 105 115 45 60 80 100 15 145 160 60 80 105 130 160 190 05 55 80 100 15 155 185 00 85 115 1 190 30 75 300 115 155 00 305 365 395 140 195 315 380 455 495 15 5 35 45 60 75 85 55 80 100 15 155 185 00 85 115 1 190 30 75 300 115 155 00 305 365 395 140 195 315 380 455 495 15 5 35 45 60 75 85 85 105 15 140 160 180 185 105 155 75 110 15 0 30 35 45 55 70 15 0 5 35 45 55 65-30 -45-65 -80-105 -130-155 -0-30 -40 - -65-80 -100-5 -35-45 -60-75 -90-110 -15-0 -30-40 - -60-70 0.40 0.45 0. 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 1440 160 1800 1980 160 340 50 100 10 145 170 195 5 1 180 15 55 95 335 380 35 40 45 55 65 75 85 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 5 10 15

PRESSURE DROP SIZE Page 137 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at.10 m 3 /s 3 m/s at.3 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.866 x p 4 m/s at.80 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 3.1 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX 1 or -stage 08 DX 1 or -stage Normal face area: 10 DX 1 or -stage 3 m/s at.10 m 3 /s 4 m/s at.80 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 1.4 1.6 1.8.0..4.6.8 40 5760 6480 700 790 8640 9360 10080 Pressure drop p, Pa 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 10 15 0 0 5 30 35 45 10 15 0 5 30 35 40 5 5 10 10 15 15 0 0 10 15 0 0 5 30 35 45 15 0 5 35 40 55 65 0 5 30 35 45 55 60 70 65 80 95 115 100 110 10 130 145 155 170 180 90 100 105 115 10 130 135 145 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 15 140 155 175 195 15 35 55 70 75 80 80 85 90 95 100 105 115 15 135 145 155 165 180 15 140 1 160 175 185 00 15 10 135 1 170 190 10 30 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 0 0 5 30 35 45 55 5 35 40 60 70 80 90 35 45 55 65 75 85 100 110 45 55 70 80 95 110 130 145 0 5 35 40 45 55 60 70 40 55 65 75 90 105 10 135 0 5 30 35 45 60 65 35 45 60 75 85 95 110 60 75 85 105 10 135 155 60 75 95 110 130 155 175 00 60 75 90 110 130 1 170 190 90 110 135 165 190 0 55 85 10 1 180 15 55 95 335 380 1 185 5 70 315 365 40 475 0 5 30 40 60 70 80 60 75 90 110 130 1 170 190 90 110 135 165 190 0 55 85 10 1 180 15 55 95 335 380 1 185 5 70 315 365 40 475 0 5 30 40 60 70 80 95 110 15 140 155 165 180 195 115 1 190 - - - 85 110 140 - - - 0 5 30 35 45 60 70 0 5 30 40 45 55 65 75-40 - -65-80 -100-115 -135-160 -40-55 -65-80 -100-10 -140-160 -30-40 - -60-70 -85-100 -115-30 -40 - -60-70 -85-100 -115 0.4 0.5 0.60 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1440 1800 160 50 880 340 3600 60 85 115 1 190 30 70 90 130 175 5 80 340 405 0 30 40 55 65 80 95 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 30 Page 138 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two damper) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three damper) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at.3 m 3 /s 3 m/s at.7 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.749 x p 4 m/s at 3.1 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 3.5 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX 1 or -stage 08 DX 1 or -stage Normal face area: 10 DX 1 or -stage 3 m/s at.3 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 3.1 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5. 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 1.4 1.7.0.3.6.9 3. 40 610 700 880 9360 10440 1150 Pressure drop p, Pa 0 5 5 5 10 10 15 0 5 5 5 10 10 15 10 15 5 30 40 60 5 10 10 15 0 5 30 5 10 10 15 0 5 30 10 15 5 30 40 60 15 5 35 45 60 75 90 0 30 40 65 80 100 40 55 70 95 115 100 115 130 1 170 185 05 90 100 115 15 135 1 160 70 80 95 115 135 155 185 70 80 95 115 135 155 185 15 1 175 10 35 60 85 70 75 80 90 95 100 105 105 10 135 1 165 185 00 15 145 160 180 00 0 40 115 135 1 190 10 30 15 0 5 30 40 55 15 0 30 35 45 60 5 35 45 55 70 85 100 30 45 55 70 85 105 10 40 55 70 90 110 135 160 15 0 5 35 40 55 30 40 65 80 95 110 10 15 0 5 35 40 45 5 30 40 55 65 80 95 35 65 80 100 10 140 45 65 85 105 130 160 190 55 75 100 15 155 185 0 80 115 1 190 30 80 330 110 1 00 310 370 435 135 190 315 385 460 545 15 5 35 45 60 80 95 55 75 95 10 1 180 10 80 110 145 180 5 65 315 105 145 190 40 95 355 40 130 180 40 300 370 445 55 15 5 35 45 60 75 90 70 85 105 115 135 1 170 65 100 140 185 70 100 135 0 5 35 60 75 90 10 0 5 35 40 65-40 -60-80 -110-135 -170-10 -5-35 - -70-85 -110-130 -30-40 -60-80 -100-15 -1-0 -5-35 - -65-80 -95 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1800 160 50 880 340 3600 3960 75 100 130 160 195 35 70 110 1 195 40 95 3 410 0 5 35 40 60 70 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

Page 139 PRESSURE DROP SIZE 31 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One dampers) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 3.1 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 3.5 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.807 x p 4 m/s at 4.1 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 4.7 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX 1 or -stage 08 DX 1 or -stage Normal face area: 10 DX 1 or -stage 3 m/s at 3.1 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 4. m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 1.8..6 3.0 3.4 3.8 4. 6480 790 9360 10800 140 13680 1510 Pressure drop p, Pa 0 5 5 5 5 10 10 0 5 5 5 5 10 10 5 10 15 0 5 30 35 5 10 10 15 0 0 5 5 5 5 10 10 15 15 5 10 15 0 5 30 35 10 15 0 5 35 45 10 15 0 30 40 60 35 65 85 105 90 105 115 130 145 160 180 85 95 105 115 15 135 145 65 70 80 95 110 130 1 65 70 80 95 110 130 1 110 130 1 175 00 5 55 65 70 75 80 90 95 100 100 110 10 135 1 165 180 115 130 145 160 175 195 15 105 15 145 170 195 0 10 15 5 30 35 45 55 15 0 5 35 40 55 0 30 40 65 75 90 30 40 65 80 95 115 35 65 85 105 15 1 15 0 5 35 40 60 5 40 65 80 95 115 15 0 30 35 45 55 65 5 35 60 75 95 110 35 70 85 110 130 155 45 65 90 110 140 170 00 70 90 115 145 170 05 75 105 135 175 15 55 305 95 135 180 30 85 340 405 10 170 5 85 355 45 5 15 0 30 40 55 70 85 65 90 110 140 165 00 70 100 130 170 05 95 95 130 175 5 75 33 390 10 165 0 80 345 415 490 15 0 30 40 55 65 85 90 110 135 155 175 00 0 60 90 130 170 45 65 95 15 15 0 30 40 60 75 10 15 0 30 35 45 55-5 -40-55 -75-95 -10-145 -15-5 -35-45 -60-75 -90-0 -30-40 -55-70 -85-105 -10-0 -5-35 -45-55 -65 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1. 1.3 1.4 880 340 3600 3960 430 4680 40 95 115 140 165 190 15 40 145 175 10 45 80 30 365 5 35 40 45 55 60 70 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 3 Page 140 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One dampers) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 3.9 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 4.3 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.843 x p 4 m/s at 5. m 3 /s 4 m/s at 5.8 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX 1 or -stage 08 DX 1 or -stage Normal face area: 10 DX 1 or -stage 3 m/s at 4.0 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 5.3 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection.4.8 3. 3.6 4.0 4.4 4.8 5. 8640 10080 1150 190 14400 15840 1780 1870 Pressure drop p, Pa 0 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 0 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 15 0 5 30 35 45 5 10 10 10 15 0 0 5 5 10 10 10 15 0 0 5 10 15 0 5 30 35 45 15 5 30 35 45 55 65 80 0 5 35 40 60 75 85 35 60 75 90 100 110 10 135 1 160 175 190 90 100 105 115 15 135 145 1 70 75 85 100 110 15 145 165 70 75 85 100 110 15 145 165 10 140 160 175 05 5 75 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 105 115 15 140 1 160 175 190 15 140 1 165 180 195 10 5 105 15 145 160 190 00 5 15 15 0 5 30 40 45 15 0 5 30 35 40 55 5 30 40 45 55 65 75 90 30 40 60 70 85 95 110 40 65 75 90 105 15 140 15 0 5 30 40 45 60 30 40 45 60 75 85 100 115 10 15 0 5 5 30 35 45 5 30 35 45 55 65 75 85 35 45 55 70 80 95 110 130 45 60 75 90 110 130 1 170 55 70 85 105 15 145 170 195 80 105 130 155 185 0 55 90 105 135 170 10 90 335 385 130 170 15 60 310 365 40 480 15 0 30 35 45 55 70 80 65 85 100 10 145 165 190 75 100 15 155 180 15 85 105 135 165 05 45 85 330 375 130 165 10 55 305 355 410 470 15 0 30 35 45 55 65 80 95 110 130 145 160 180 195 10 70 95 15 160 195 70 90 115 145 15 0 5 35 40 60 70 10 15 0 5 35 40 55-30 -40-55 -65-80 -100-10 -140-0 -5-35 -40 - -65-75 -90-0 -30-40 - -60-70 -85-100 -15-0 -5-30 -40-45 -55-65 0.90 1.05 1.0 1.35 1. 1.65 1.80 340 3780 430 4860 5400 5940 6480 80 100 15 155 185 15 10 155 190 30 75 30 370 5 30 40 45 55 65 75 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 33 Page 141 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One dampers) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 4.8 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 5. m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.843 x p 4 m/s at 6.4 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 6.9 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX 1 or -stage 08 DX 1 or -stage Normal face area: 10 DX 1 or -stage 3 m/s at 4.8 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 6.4 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 3.5 3.9 4.3 4.7 5.1 5.5 5.9 6.3 1600 14040 15480 1690 18360 19800 140 680 Pressure drop p, Pa 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 10 10 10 15 15 0 5 5 10 10 10 15 15 0 5 5 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 5 30 35 45 60 70 75 5 35 40 55 65 75 85 110 115 15 135 145 160 170 180 95 105 110 115 15 130 140 145 75 80 90 100 110 10 135 1 75 80 90 100 110 10 135 1 130 140 155 165 180 190 05 0 75 75 80 85 90 90 95 100 115 10 130 140 1 160 170 180 135 145 155 165 175 190 00 15 0 0 5 30 35 40 45 0 5 30 35 40 45 55 35 40 45 55 65 70 80 90 40 60 70 80 90 100 110 55 65 75 90 100 115 130 145 5 5 30 35 45 55 60 45 55 60 70 85 95 105 10 15 0 5 5 30 35 40 45 35 40 45 55 65 70 80 90 60 70 80 95 105 10 135 65 80 95 110 15 145 160 180 70 85 100 10 135 155 175 195 110 130 1 175 05 30 60 90 145 170 00 35 70 305 345 385 180 15 55 95 335 380 430 480 5 30 35 45 60 70 80 70 85 100 10 135 155 175 195 110 130 1 175 05 30 60 90 145 170 00 35 70 305 345 385 180 15 55 95 335 380 430 480 5 30 35 45 60 70 80 140 155 175 190 05 5 40 55 0 5 35 40 60 70 85 0 5 30 35 45 55 65 75 1. 1.3 1.45 1.6 1.7 1.85.0 430 4680 50 5760 610 6660 700 95 110 130 1 170 195 0 140 160 195 30 90 330 30 35 40 45 60 65 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 10 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 40 60 90 10 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 40 Page 14 Pressure drop, Pa Unit section Designation Remarks Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h.8 3. 3.6 4.0 4.4 4.8 5. 5.6 10080 1150 1960 14400 15840 1780 1870 0160 Pressure drop p, Pa End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN,5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 4.0 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 4.5 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.807 x p 4 m/s at 5.3 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 6.0 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX 1 or -stage 08 DX -stage Normal face area: 10 DX -stage 3 m/s at 4.0 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 5.3 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 15 0 0 5 30 35 45 10 15 0 5 30 35 40 5 5 10 10 15 15 0 0 10 15 0 0 5 30 35 45 15 0 5 35 40 55 65 0 5 30 35 45 55 60 70 65 80 95 115 100 110 10 130 145 155 170 180 90 100 105 115 10 130 135 145 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 15 140 155 175 195 15 35 55 70 75 80 80 85 90 95 100 105 115 15 135 145 155 165 180 15 140 1 160 175 185 00 15 10 135 1 170 190 10 30 15 0 5 30 35 45 55 0 5 30 35 40 45 55 60 30 40 45 55 65 75 85 95 40 60 70 80 95 105 10 60 75 90 105 10 140 160 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 55 30 40 60 70 80 90 105 15 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 5 35 40 60 70 80 90 40 65 75 90 100 115 135 55 70 85 100 115 135 155 175 70 85 105 15 145 165 190 15 100 15 155 185 15 85 35 135 170 05 45 85 330 380 430 165 10 55 305 360 415 475 535 0 30 35 45 55 65 80 95 65 80 100 10 140 160 185 10 100 10 1 180 10 40 75 315 130 165 00 35 80 30 370 415 160 05 95 345 400 460 50 0 5 35 45 55 65 75 90 75 85 95 105 10 130 140 1 80 105 135 165 00 60 75 95 10 145 0 5 35 40 60 70 80 15 0 5 35 40 55 65-40 -55-65 -80-100 -10-140 -160-5 -35-40 - -65-75 -90-100 -30-40 - -60-70 -85-100 -115-0 -5-30 -40-45 -55-65 -75 1.00 1.15 1.30 1.45 1.60 1.75 1.90 3600 4140 4680 50 5760 6300 6840 85 110 135 160 190 0 130 165 00 40 80 35 375 0 30 35 40 55 65 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 41 Page 143 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 5.0 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 5.6 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.843 x p 4 m/s at 6.7 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 7.4 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX 1 or -stage 08 DX -stage Normal face area: 10 DX -stage 3 m/s at 5.0 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 6.7 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 1600 14400 1600 18000 19800 1600 3400 500 Pressure drop Dp, Pa 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 10 15 15 0 5 30 35 40 10 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 5 10 10 10 15 15 0 0 10 15 15 0 5 30 35 40 15 0 5 30 40 45 55 65 15 5 30 35 45 60 70 60 75 90 100 110 10 130 145 155 170 180 90 100 105 115 10 130 135 145 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 15 140 155 175 195 15 35 55 70 75 80 80 85 90 95 100 105 115 15 135 145 155 165 180 110 15 1 175 00 15 10 135 1 170 190 10 30 15 0 5 30 35 45 55 0 5 30 35 40 45 55 60 30 40 45 55 65 75 85 95 40 60 70 80 95 105 10 60 75 90 105 10 140 160 15 0 5 30 35 40 55 35 40 60 70 80 95 105 0 5 35 40 45 55 60 70 35 45 55 65 75 90 100 115 60 75 90 105 15 140 160 65 80 100 115 140 160 185 05 65 80 100 10 140 160 185 10 100 10 1 180 10 40 75 315 130 165 00 35 80 30 370 415 160 05 95 345 400 460 50 0 5 35 45 55 65 75 90 65 80 100 10 140 160 185 10 100 10 1 180 10 40 75 315 130 165 00 35 80 30 370 415 160 05 95 345 400 460 50 0 5 35 45 55 65 75 90 95 105 10 135 1 160 175 190 80 105 135 170 60 80 100 10 0 5 35 40 60 70 85 0 5 30 35 45 55 65 75-40 - -65-80 -100-115 -140-160 -5-35 -40 - -65-75 -85-100 -30-40 - -60-70 -85-100 -115-0 -5-30 -35-45 -55-65 -75 1. 1.4 1.6 1.8.0..4 430 40 5760 6480 700 790 8640 80 105 130 160 190 0 55 10 155 195 35 80 330 380 0 30 35 40 60 65 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 4 Page 144 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two damper) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 6.1 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 6.7 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.868 x p 4 m/s at 8. m 3 /s 4 m/s at 8.9 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX 1 or -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX -stage 08 DX -stage Normal face area: 10 DX -stage 3 m/s at 6.1 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 8. m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 4. 4.8 5.4 6.0 6.6 7. 7.8 8.4 1510 1780 19440 1600 3760 590 8080 3040 Pressure drop p, Pa 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 0 5 30 35 40 10 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 5 5 10 10 15 15 0 0 10 15 15 0 5 30 35 40 15 0 5 30 40 45 55 60 15 0 30 35 40 60 70 45 60 75 90 100 110 10 130 145 155 170 180 90 100 105 115 10 130 135 145 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 15 140 155 175 195 15 35 55 70 75 80 80 85 90 95 100 105 115 15 135 145 155 165 180 15 140 1 160 175 185 00 15 10 135 1 170 190 10 30 15 0 5 30 35 40 55 0 5 30 35 40 45 55 60 30 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 40 45 55 70 80 90 105 10 60 75 90 105 10 135 155 15 0 5 30 35 45 55 35 40 60 70 85 95 110 0 5 30 40 45 60 65 35 45 55 65 75 85 100 110 60 75 90 105 10 140 155 60 80 95 115 135 155 180 00 65 80 100 115 135 160 180 05 95 10 145 175 05 35 70 305 130 160 195 30 70 315 360 410 160 00 45 90 340 395 4 510 0 5 35 45 65 75 90 65 80 100 115 135 160 180 05 95 10 145 175 05 35 70 305 130 160 195 30 70 315 360 410 160 00 45 90 340 395 4 510 0 5 35 45 65 75 90 95 105 10 135 1 160 175 190 80 105 135 165 00 60 75 95 10 145 0 5 30 35 45 60 70 15 0 5 30 35 45 60-35 - -60-75 -90-105 -15-145 -5-30 -40-45 -55-70 -80-90 -5-35 -45-55 -65-75 -90-105 -15-0 -30-35 -40 - -60-65 1.30 1.55 1.80.05.30.55.80 4680 5580 6480 7380 880 9180 10080 65 90 115 140 170 05 40 100 135 170 15 60 305 355 0 5 30 40 45 55 65 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

PRESSURE DROP SIZE Page 145 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 6.4 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 7.1 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.843 x p 4 m/s at 8.6 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 9.5 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX -stage 08 DX -stage Normal face area: 10 DX -stage 3 m/s at 6.4 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 8.6 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 4.0 4.8 5.6 6.4 7. 8.0 8.8 14400 1780 0160 3040 590 8800 31680 Pressure drop p, Pa 5 5 5 5 10 10 15 5 5 5 5 10 10 15 10 10 15 0 5 30 35 5 10 15 15 0 5 35 5 5 10 10 10 15 0 10 10 15 0 5 30 35 10 15 5 30 35 45 55 15 0 5 35 40 60 45 60 80 95 110 15 140 155 170 190 90 100 110 10 130 140 1 70 75 90 100 10 140 160 70 75 90 100 10 140 160 115 140 160 180 15 40 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 105 105 115 130 140 155 170 185 15 140 155 170 185 05 0 100 15 145 165 00 5 15 0 5 30 40 45 55 15 0 30 35 40 60 5 35 45 55 65 80 95 30 45 55 70 85 100 10 40 55 70 90 110 130 155 15 15 0 0 5 5 30 5 30 40 60 70 80 0 5 30 40 60 70 30 40 55 70 85 100 115 45 60 75 95 115 140 165 55 75 95 10 1 180 10 55 75 95 10 145 175 05 80 110 145 180 0 60 305 110 145 190 40 90 345 405 135 185 35 95 360 430 5 15 0 35 45 55 70 85 55 75 95 10 145 175 05 80 110 145 180 0 60 305 110 145 190 40 90 345 405 135 185 35 95 360 430 5 15 5 35 45 55 70 85 70 85 100 115 130 145 160 60 90 10 160 45 65 90 115 15 5 30 40 65 75 15 0 5 35 45 55 65-35 - -65-85 -105-130 -160-0 -30-40 -55-70 -85-100 -5-35 -45-60 -75-95 -115-15 -0-30 -40 - -60-75 1. 1.5 1.8.1.4.7 3.0 430 5400 6480 7560 8640 970 10800 55 80 110 140 175 15 55 85 10 165 10 65 30 380 15 0 5 35 45 55 65 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 51 Page 146 Pressure drop, Pa Unit section Designation Remarks Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h 5.0 5.8 6.6 7.4 8. 9.0 9.8 10.5 18000 0880 3760 6640 950 3400 3580 37800 Pressure drop p, Pa End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Conn. at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers) Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN,5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 7.8 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 8.5 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.868 x p 4 m/s at 10 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 11.3 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX -stage 08 DX -stage Normal face area: 3 m/s at 7.8 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 10 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 10 10 15 0 0 5 30 35 5 10 15 15 0 5 30 30 5 5 5 10 10 15 15 0 10 10 15 0 0 5 30 35 10 15 0 5 35 40 45 55 15 0 5 30 35 45 60 45 60 75 95 110 10 130 145 155 170 180 90 95 105 110 10 130 135 145 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 15 145 165 185 10 30 55 80 70 75 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 115 15 135 145 155 170 180 15 135 145 160 170 185 00 15 105 15 145 165 190 10 35 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 55 15 0 5 30 40 45 55 5 35 40 60 70 80 90 35 45 55 65 75 90 100 115 45 55 70 85 100 115 135 1 15 15 0 0 5 5 5 30 5 30 40 45 55 65 70 80 0 5 30 35 45 60 70 30 40 60 75 85 100 115 45 55 70 85 105 10 140 160 55 75 90 110 135 155 180 05 55 75 90 110 130 155 175 00 85 110 135 165 195 30 65 95 115 145 180 0 60 305 3 395 140 180 5 75 35 380 440 490 15 5 30 40 60 70 85 55 75 90 110 130 155 175 00 85 110 135 165 195 30 65 95 115 145 180 0 60 305 3 395 15 5 30 40 60 70 8 90 105 10 135 1 165 180 190 65 90 115 145 180 65 85 105 130 15 5 30 35 45 55 65 75 15 0 5 30 40 45 55 65-35 -45-55 -70-90 -105-15 -145-0 -30-35 -45-55 -65-80 -90-5 -30-40 - -65-75 -90-105 -15-0 -5-35 -40 - -60-65 1.8.1.4.7 3.0 3.3 3.6 6480 7560 8640 970 10800 11880 1960 80 100 130 155 185 15 10 155 190 30 75 35 375 0 5 35 40 55 65 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

PRESSURE DROP SIZE 53 Page 147 Pressure drop, Pa Air flow, m 3 /s Air flow, m 3 /h Unit section Designation Remarks End connection frame EUVA With damper Connection section EUVB Conn. at the end wall b = 1, (One damper) Conn. at the top or bottom b = 3, 4, 5 Mixing section EUVC Con at the end wall bb = 01 (Two dampers Conn. at the end wall bb = 0, 03, 1, 13 Conn. at the top or bottom bb = 0, 03, 04, 1, 13, 14 Mixing and exhaust section EUVD Conn. at partition wall bb = 0, 03 (Three dampers) Return air bb = 03 Intake / Exhaust section EUVE Inlet grille, damper Pleated filter EUPA Filter class EU3, G85, cleanable EU3, G85, disposible Short bag filter EUPB Filter class EU3, G85 EU4, G90 EU5, F45 Long bag filter EUPC Filter class EU3, G85 EU5, F45 EU6, F65 Filter / Coalescor EUPD Air heater, hot water EUME Capacity variant 1 3 4 5 Air heater, steam EUMS Capacity variant 1 Air heater, electric EUM(K,L) Capacity variant 1 EUMK: Low temperature, Finned coil 3 EUML: Safety class Eexe T3 4 Air cooler, chilled water EUMN.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 06 Pressure drop p 1 Normal face area: Max. face area: 08 for max. face area 3 m/s at 10.6 m 3 /s 3 m/s at 11.3 m 3 /s 10 p 1 = 0.899 x p 4 m/s at 14.1 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 15.0 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator Air cooler, EUMP.5 mm fin pitch Capacity variant 04 DX -stage evaporative refrigerant 06 DX -stage Normal face area: 3 m/s at 10.6 m 3 /s 4 m/s at 14.1 m 3 /s Droplet eliminator REGOTERM EUMF Humidifier EUQA Glass fibre 85% 60% Air distributor EULZ-13 Fan size 3 Diffuser EULZ-14 Fan size 3 With air distributor, fan size 3 DUOVENT Air flow m 3 /s Air distribution section EUMD.0 mm fin pitch Air flow m 3 /h Air heater, hot water b = 1, 3 Air heater, hot water b = 5, 6 Air heater, steam b =, 4 Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa REGOVENT Air distribution section EUMR Duct connection Air velocity, duct, m/s Pressure drop, Pa Exhaust air section EUMO Duct connection 7 8 9 10 11 1 13 14 500 8800 3400 36000 39600 4300 46800 400 Pressure drop p, Pa 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 15 10 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 10 15 15 0 5 30 35 40 5 10 10 10 15 15 0 5 10 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 15 5 30 35 45 60 70 0 5 30 40 45 55 65 75 60 75 90 100 110 10 130 145 155 170 180 90 100 105 115 10 130 135 145 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 70 75 85 95 105 10 135 1 15 140 155 175 195 15 35 55 70 75 80 80 85 90 95 100 105 115 15 135 145 155 165 180 15 140 1 160 175 185 00 15 10 135 1 170 190 10 30 15 0 5 30 35 40 45 0 0 5 30 40 45 55 30 35 40 60 70 80 90 35 45 55 65 75 85 100 110 45 55 70 85 95 115 130 145 15 15 0 0 5 5 5 30 30 35 40 55 65 75 80 0 5 30 35 45 60 65 35 40 60 75 85 95 110 45 60 70 85 100 10 135 155 60 75 95 110 130 1 175 195 60 75 90 110 130 1 170 195 90 115 140 165 195 5 55 90 10 1 185 0 55 95 340 385 1 185 30 75 30 370 45 480 0 5 30 40 60 70 80 60 75 90 110 130 1 170 195 90 115 140 165 195 5 55 90 0 5 30 40 60 70 80 105 10 135 140 165 180 195 10 70 95 10 1 180 55 70 90 110 130 0 30 35 45 60 75 85 15 0 30 35 40 60 70-40 -55-65 -85-100 -10-140 -165-5 -35-45 -55-65 -75-90 -105-30 -40 - -60-75 -85-100 -10-0 -5-30 -40-45 -55-65 -75.4.8 3. 3.6 4.0 4.4 4.8 8640 10080 1150 1960 14400 15840 1780 75 100 15 1 180 10 45 115 1 185 5 70 315 365 0 5 35 40 55 65 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 6 8 10 1 14 16 0 35 60 90 15 160 0 0 0 0 5 10

NOTES Page 148

FANS - CONTENTS Page 149 Page Design of normal version...1 Air flow measurement...153 Vibration isolation...153 Aerodynamic performance...154 Acoustic data...154 Fan selection...155 Selection of motor size...156 Controlling the air flow rate...157 Throttle control...158 Inlet guide vane control...160 Speed control...16 Control equipment...163 Fan starting methods...167 Acoustic data...171 Fan chart...173 Fan chart specification motor data...174

FANS Page 1 Design of normal version, Fan casing The fan casing is made of sendzimir galvanised sheet steel. The casing side plates are stamped in one piece. This ensures accurate location of the hole for the inlet and the mounting points for the radial supporting arms and frames. The inlets deep-pressed in casing sides contribute towards very high rigidity of the casing, thus ensuring smooth, vibration-free operation of the fan, even att high speeds. The sides and scroll plate of the casing are jointed by the thoroughly proven Pittsburg folding method which produces tight, strong joints. The method guarantees high, consistent quality and good dimensional accuracy of the casing. The casing side plates are internally provided with welded nuts at all holes for securing the bearing supports and at inaccessible holes for securing the base frame. This facilitates the removal and fitting of these parts. Fan inlet The design of the fan inlet is of vital importance to the fan efficiency and sound generated by the fan. On fans with forward-curved blades, good performance is achieved by pressing the inlets directly into the side plates. On fans with backward-curved blades, the inlet must be deeper and must also extend into the impeller with a certain amount of overlap and a small, accurately predetermined radial gap. These inlets are deep-drawn in one piece and are fitted into special pressed recesses in the casing sides. The inlets are made of aluminium for normal version fans and of copper alloy for spark-proof fans. Fan impellers The fan impellers are designed for high rigidity and strength. They are balanced to an accuracy which is better than ISO Standard 1940-1973, G 6.3 at the maximum speed. The impeller is secured to the shaft by means of a taper sleeve. As a result, it is always mounted as accurately on the fan shaft as it has been on the shaft of the balancing machine. The impeller and shaft together will therefore always retain the exceptional balancing accuracy achieved when the impeller was balanced. EULF impellers The impeller has forward-curved blades and therefore generates a high flow rate and high pressure in relation to the speed. The pressure characteristic is extremely flat, which means that the pressure rise generated by the fan is fairly independent of the air flow. Due to the careful design of the impeller, inlet and volute casing, the pressure characteristic of the EULF fan is stable throughout the working range. Throttling control by means of a simple damper can therefore be employed for the fan. (Recommended up to an air flow of approx. 1.4 m 3 /s.) Since the power demand drops significantly on a reduction in the air flow, even this simple method of control provides major energy savings. The impellers are made of sendzimir galvanised sheet steel and are provided with a steel hub. The EULF impeller should be selected if a compact fan is required for a given air flow. EULB impellers The impeller has backward-curved blades and is characterised by an extremely high efficiency, low sound level an a stable characteristic throughout the recommended working range. The fan characteristic is very steep, which is beneficial if variations in the system resistance must cause only minor changes in the air flow. The steep curve is also highly beneficial if several fans are to operate in parallel. The EULB impeller is well suited for inlet guide vane control. The stable nature of the pressure/flow characteristic is retained throughout the control range. The impeller does not give rise to the pulsations and low-frequency sound often caused by impellers of certain other makes.

FANS Page 151 EULB impellers, reinforced design The reinforcement consists principally of the blades being made of a material with particulary high strength and being continuously welded to the backplate and shroud. Shafts for belt-driven fans The steel shafts are centreless-ground and are provided with keyways for the belt pulleys at both ends of double-inlet fans. The shafts are designed with a high factor of safety against fatigue and for a critical speed which is at least 40% higher than the maximum fan speed. Bearings for belt-driven fans Base frames for belt-driven fans The base frame supports the fan, motor and belt drive. The belt drive gives rise to high loads on the shaft (600-100 Newton per belt), and the loads also vary due to the irregularity of the belts. To enable the belts to be tensioned and to ensure smooth running, fans of smaller sizes are equipped with a pivoted motor bracket which, together with the base frame and fan, forms a very rigid unit. In the case of larger sizes, the fan and motor are mounted on common longitudinal beams which are extra high to ensure maximum possible stiffness in bending. However, the beam height does not increase the overall height of the fan unit, since the fan casing is located between the beams. Most fans are equipped with permanently lubricated, single-row, deep-grooove ball bearings secured to the shaft by means of a taper mounting sleeve. This method of mounting ensures that the inner race of the bearing will always be concentric with the shaft, and that the bearing will not work loose. The concentricity ensures smooth, vibration-free operation and long useful life of the fan. The method of mounting also eliminates shaft damage caused by set-screws and glueing used in other methods of mounting. Due to the mounting sleeve fitted between the shaft and bearing, the bearing must be one size larger than it would have been without the sleeve. The useful life of the bearing is therefore increased by 3 to 5 times. Each deep-groove ball bearing is mounted in a rubber damper and is fitted into a bearing housing supported by a sturdy three-arm or four-arm spider. The larger EU(D,L)B fans are equipped as standard with plummer blocks which have self-aligning roller bearings mounted on a sturdy bearing bracket made of welded flat iron bar. The deep-groove ball bearings are permanently lubricated, whereas the self-aligning roller bearings are fitted with grease nipples. All bearings are rated, with 90% probability, for a life cycle of 40 000 hours at the maximum speed. The probable mean useful life is thus 00 000 hours or more at the maximum fan speed, and appreciably longer at lower speeds. The self-aligning ball bearings should be greased through the grease nipples on the inspection side of the unit, either once a year if the fans are on daytime operation only, or twice a year if the fans run around the clock.

Variable pitch inlet guide vanes FANS Belt drive, motor and accessories - Design Page 15 CENTRIMASTER fans with backward-curved blades are available in a version with variable pitch inlet guide vanes. The air flow and pressure rise can be continously varied by adjusting the pitch of the guide vanes. The design and location of the guide vanes in the inlet cone provide a substantial reduction in the power demand. Since guide vane control involves no power losses in the drive system, the reduction in power demand results in a direct reduction in the operating costs. The inlet guide vanes are located deep inside the inlet cone, i.e. at a point where the air velocity is a maximum. As a result, they provide an immediate change in the fan performance throughout the control range, even close to full flow. The guide vanes and impeller are specially matched to one another, and the fan performance is therefore perfectly stable throughout the control range, down to 15-0% of the flow (7-10% on two-speed operation). Inlet guide vane control of EU fans is therefore beneficial in VAV systems, and eliminates the risk of surging and low-frequency sound phenomena in the fan and ducting that may otherwise occur when speed control is employed. The guide vanes are designed in accordance with a patented floating ring principle, whereby the only moving part, apart from the blades themselves, is the control ring which has a floating mounting at the inner ends of the blades. The absence of a control mechanism in the true sense has entirely eliminated the need for lubrication and maintenance. The design also minimises the frictional forces, and inexpensive, standard, low-torque damper actuators can therefore be employed. Spark-proof fans Fans with backward-curved blades [EU(D,L)B] can be supplied in a spark-proof version conforming to the provisions of German Standard VDMA 4 169 3.1-3. and 3.4. The inlet cone is made of copper alloy. If the fan is of single-inlet design, the shaft entry are also lined with copper alloy. The belt drive consists of belt pulleys, V-belt or belts and belt guard. The pulley hubs are of Taper-Lock type which are easy to fit an remove. The belt guard is made of perforated, galvanised sheet steel and conforms to current safety regulations. The fan speed can be measured without the need for removing the belt guard. The belt drive is sized for each combination of fan and motor and for the required speed, so that the motor and fan bearings will have a useful life of at least 40 000 hours and the belts will have a useful life of at least 5 000 hours. The belt drive is normally installed at the factory. The belt drive must be ordered together with the fan and motor, so that the correct information will be available for sizing the drive. Motors The maximum motor size is specified on the pages after the detailed charts for each fan size. For belt-driven fans, the motor should be selected on the basis of the scale for the minimum recommended motor rating PM for direct on-line starting, as shown in the fan chart. If star-delta starting is to be used, check that the motor rating is sufficient to enable the motor to run up to full speed within the maximum permissible starting time (see Catalogue section B). The motors have degree of protection IP 54 or IP 55, depending on the IEC size, and are rated for operation at ambient temperatures up to 40 C. Two-speed motors with the following speed ratios have: 1: one stator winding 1:1.5 two stator windings Other motors are available to special order. Larger belt-driven fans can be ordered with two motors. Note. The motor should be ordered from FläktW oodsat the same time as the fan, and will then be mounted in position at the factory. The fan will be tested before delivery, and then FläktW oods will accept full warranty responsibility. If FläktW ood is not given particulars of the motor, the belt drive cannot be sized. Flexible connection ducts Flexible connection ducts are made of PVC-coated glass fibre fabric.

Page 153 FANS Air flow measurement The double-inlet centrifugal fans in the EU units can be equipped with a flow measurement tapping in the inner inlet, i.e. the inlet in which the air flow is not disturbed by the belt drive. The differential between the pressure at the measurement tapping and the pressure in the fan section is a measure of the flow rate through the fan. The flow measurement tapping is calibrated, and the relationship between the flow rate and the pressure differential is shown in a chart. The accuracy is ± 5%. If the fan is equipped with two motors, i.e. if it has a belt drive at each fan inlet, the measurement tapping will be disturbed by a belt drive. The magnitude of the disturbance is dependent on factors such as the size of the pulley at the measurement inlet, and the measurement accuracy will thus not be as high as it would be in an undisturbed inlet. The measurement tapping can very well be used for relative measurements, and the accuracy is of the order of ± 10%. A direct-reading instrument which is connected to the pressure tapping of the flow measuring device and which gives a direct reading on a scale of the flow rate in m 3 /s is included. Vibration isolation The centrifugal fans included in the EU air handling units are always mounted on anti-vibration mountings. These may consist of either cylindrical rubber elements or steel coil springs. Rubber anti-vibration mountings In most cases, rubber anti-vibration mountings provide sufficient isolation, since they are rated so that the vibration-including force transmitted to the unit casing will be less than % of the impeller. (This requirement is specified by Swedish Building Code VVS-AMA 83 to which reference is usually made in the Scandinavian countries.) The smaller fans are mounted on in-shear-type mountings, whereas the larger fans are mounted on compression mountings. This means that units equipped with smaller fans can be installed vertically, whereas units with larger fans can only be mounted horizontally. The limitations in the method of installation are given in the ordering key, see page 38.

Page 154 FANS Aerodynamic performance The aerodynamic performance data have been measured by testing in accordance with AMCA-10-85, with a discharge duct of the same size as the fan outlet. A standard duct slightly larger than the fan outlet should usually be selected. If the dimensions of the fan outlet are, for instance, 80 x 80 mm, the nearest standard duct size is 300 x 300 mm. The sudden change in cross-sectional area causes a shock loss which is specified in the fan charts as pa, Pa. In the case of a free discharge fan, the losses consist of the conventional dynamic pressure Pd, Pa, and also the pressure component pb, Pa, shown in the fan charts and occurring due to the non-uniform velocity distribution at the fan outlet. A perforated distribution plate or diffuser can also be fitted at the fan outlet. The losses or gains caused by these accessories are specified separately for each unit section. Testing in accordance with AMCA-10-85, is equivalent to testing in accordance with BS 848:Part 1:1980 or in accordance with DIN 41 163, part 1, for centrifugal fans. Acoustic data The acoustic data have been obtained from sound measurements in accordance with AMCA 300-85, whereby the sound pressure is measured in a reverberant room and is then converted to the specified sound power level. The sound power emitted to the duct is specified in the chart as the total sound power level comprising all eight octave bands from 63 to 8000 Hz. The octave band distribution through the unit casing to the outlet duct, to the inlet side of the fan and to the surroundings is shown separately for each unit type. There are several methods for measuring the sound to the duct: U.S. AMCA 300-85 Figure 3 GB BS 848:Part :1985 Clause 6 D DIN 45 635, part 9 ISO 5136 All the methods, except the U.S. method, specify sound measurement by means of microphones located in the duct, and the methods are very similar to one another. There are differences in opinion concerning the suitability of the in-duct measurement method. The problem is that the results obtained by the induct measurement method differ from those obtained from measurements in a reverberant room. Measurements on CENTRIVENT fans both in accordance with the AMCA method in our own laboratories and in accordance with the BS method in the NEL laboratories in Glasgow showed that the in-duct measurement method generally gives higher levels in the lowest bands and appreciably lower levels in the high bands. The data specified in the catalogues of several manufacturers are in accordance with one of the induct measurement methods. We are of the opinion that consulting engineers in the field of acoustics are better served by the AMCA data. However, it is necessary to quantify the differences in the acoustic values between the two methods. db is the difference in sound power level to the duct in accordance with ISO minus AMCA. Hz 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000 db +5 +1 +1 0 0-6 -10-1 If we were to specify the sound to the duct in accordance with the ISO method, the value for the 63 Hz band, for instance, would have to be raised by 5 db and that for the 8000 Hz band would have to be lowered by 1 db.

FAN SELECTION Page 155 EU units are available with a wide range of fan types and sizes and a variety of control facilities. EULF Centrifugal fan with forward-curved blades In relation to its size, the EULF fan delivers high rates of air flow at moderate sound emission levels. The maximum fan efficiency is around 70%. The pressure/flow characteristic is flat, i.e. the pressure rise is insignificantly affected by changes in air flow rate, whereas the power demand decreases rapidly with decreasing air flow rate. This characteristic can be put to use in Variable Air Volume (VAV) systems, since the air flow rate can easily be controlled by means of a damper in the duct system without excessive pressure losses. At the same time, due to the steep power characteristic, the power demand decreases steeply with decreasing air flow rate. Damper control is recommended for air flow rates up to approx. 3 m 3 /s. The EULF fan is specially designed for throttle control, without the risk of pulsations or low-frequency sound. EULB Centrifugal fan with backward-curved blades The EU(D,L)B fan has a high efficiency of up to around 85% and is therefore recommended whenever power saving is essential. The pressure/flow characteristic is steep, and the air flow rate thus remains reasonably constant if pressure variations should occur in the system. This is beneficial in Constant Air Volume (CAV) systems. For VAV systems, the EULB fan is available in unit sizes 1 53 with variable pitch inlet guide vanes fitted to both inlets of the double-inlet fan. Fan selection 1. Select the unit size to suit the required air flow rate and air handling functions.. EULB or EULF fans The EULB fan should be selected for pressures above the pressure range of the EULF fan. Within areas in which the two fan types overlap, the fan should be selected to suit the specified efficiency, sound level and control characteristics. 3. Fan size If more than one fan size could be selected for a certain operating point for a given unit size, the rule is generally as follows: Bigger fans have a higher efficiency and the outlet air velocity is lower and lower sound level whereas smaller fans command a lower price. 4. Normal or heavy-duty designs The EULB fan is available in two standard versions: normal design (the lighter area in the charts) for pressure rises up to 000 Pa heavy-duty version with continuously welded blades (the darker area in the charts) for pressure rises up to 3600 Pa. The heavy-duty version can be selected towards the upper limit of the lighter area in order to compensate for possible deviations from the calculated pressure drops or for any future increases in pressure or air flow rate. Fan charts The fan charts are applicable to air with a density of 1. kg/m 3. The recommended operating ranges of the fans are marked in grey pale for fans of normal design and darker for heavy-duty fans. Several operating curves are plotted in the operating range, and the fan efficiency along each of these curves is constant. The total sound pressure level Lwt is shown in the charts. The frequency break-down into octave bands and the correction factors for sound to the surroundings are specified under Acoustic data, see page 171. In addition, the charts include scales showing the losses occurring on different connections to the fan outlet.

Page 156 SELECTION OF FANS AND MOTORS Selection of motor size The fan charts specify the power demand P, kw, necessary for driving the fan impeller and PM, kw, which is the minimum recommended motor rating for direct on-line starting. These figures take into account the power losses in the belt drive using belt pulleys from a standard series. Since belt pulleys to ISO standard are employed, the deviation from the delivery speed amounts to a maximum of 3%. For star-delta starting, the necessary motor rating may sometimes be higher. For further particulars, see also under Fan starting. Note. Quotations for fan sections with motors other than those listed under Motors in this catalogue and for fan sections with twin motors will be submitted on request, provided that the motors can be installed at our factory, so that they can be tested together with the fans prior to delivery. Connection alternatives 1. Connection to a duct of the same size as the fan outlet. The fan charts are applicable to this connection alternative.. Connection to a duct with larger dimensions than the fan outlet. A shock loss pa will occur due to the change in area between the fan outlet and the connected duct with the height and width dimensions specified in the fan charts. 3. Connection to some other unit section downstream of the fan, or a fan with open discharge. A discharge loss pb + pd will occur, where pd is the dynamic pressure at the fan outlet and pb is the extra loss occurring as a result of non-uniform velocity distribution at the fan outlet.

CONTROLLING THE AIR FLOW RATE Page 157 In many cases, the air flow rate delivered by a fan must be adjusted to variations in the operating conditions of the system. This may involve control in two steps, with a lower air flow rate during the night, or continuously variable control, such as in a VAV air handling system. All EU air handling units can be equipped with fans for simple control. Two-step control Either one two-speed motor or two separate motors are used for two step control. Such simple, energy-efficient two-step control system can be used for fans with either forward-curved or backward-curved blades. Continuously variable control methods 1. Throttle control of a fan with forward-curved blades is a simple method used for air flow rates below 3 m 3 /s.. Inlet guide vane control for fans with backwardcurved blades and the patented inlet guide vanes can also be employed in combination with a twospeed motor. Inlet guide vane control can be specified for sizes EU 1 to EU 53. 3. Speed control for fans with forward-curved or backward-curved blades. Locations of pressure sensors in VAV systems Air handling systems with variable air flow rates, known as VAV systems, are the most common application for continuously variable fan speed control. The pressure is generally maintained constant in both the supply air and the exhaust air duct. The location of the pressure sensor is of decisive importance in this case. Main rules The supply air pressure sensor should be located immediately upstream of the flow control unit which is nearest to the air handling unit. (The first supply air terminal unit is usually critical from the pressure drop aspect.) The exhaust air pressure sensor should be located at the flow control unit which is furthest away from the air handling unit. (The last exhaust air terminal unit is usually critical from the pressure drop aspect.) N.B. A pressure sensor must never be located immediately downstream of a fan outlet.

DAMPER CONTROL OF FANS WITH FORWARD-CURVED BLADES Page 158 Control principle The sensor (1) measures the controlled variable (e.g. the air flow rate or air pressure). This value is compared in the controller () with a preset value (set point) which is either constant or variable. In the event of a deviation from the set point, a signal is applied to the actuator (3) which then alters the setting of the throttling damper until the controlled variable corresponds to the set point. Operation ) Alternative location of damper 3) 1) At least,5 x nominal duct diameter Total pressure rise C B E A Air flow rate Power demand D The figure shows diagrammatically the conditions prevailing during throttle control of an EULF fan with forward-curved blades. When the flow is dampered, the operating point of the fan is displaced along the fan characteristic from A to C, and the system operating point along the system curve from A to B. The losses in the damper are represented by the distance C B. The power demand drops from D to E. Damper control is very well suited for fan impellers with forward curved blades, since the power demand drops rapidly with decreasing air flow rate. High rates of air flow and high pressures may give rise to high throttling losses and cause a drop in efficiency which is significant from the energy consumption aspect. Damper control is therefore not recommended for air flow rates above 3 m 3 /s.

DAMPER CONTROL OF FANS WITH FORWARD-CURVED BLADES Page 159 Example The air flow rate delivered by an EULF 0 fan is to be controlled by means of a throttling damper between a maximum of 1. m 3 /s and a minimum of 0.6 m 3 /s. The total pressure rise should then be 1410 and 400 Pa respectively. What will be the power demand and what will be the sound power level at maximum and minimum air flow rates. SOLUTION AIR FLOW RATE max. min. Air flow rate, m 3 /s 1. 0.6 Total pressure rise, Pa 1410 400 Pressure drop across fully open damper, Pa 10 - Total pressure rise necessary, Pa 140 400 Plot points A and B in the fan chart. Read the fan speed, r/min 700 700 Plot point C (point of intersection between 0.6 m 3 /s and 700 r/min) Determine points D and E. Total pressure rise across the fan at points A and C, Pa 140 130 Power demand (points D and E), kw.7 1.4 Total sound power level Lwt to the inlet or outlet duct (point D or C), db 93 91 1) Pressure drop across the damper (C B), Pa 830 ) 1) Depending on its location in the system, the damper may generate additional sound in the system when it is in the throttled position. ) 130 400 = 830 Result. The calculations show that the power demand at maximum air flow rate is.7 kw and at minimum air flow rate it is 1.4 kw, to which the power losses in the belt drive must be added. The total sound power levels are 93 and 91 db respectively. EULF 0-90 300 p t,pa P,kW p d 400 000 1000 0 00 1000 Lwt,dB 80 85 100 0.5 m 3 /s 1 1.5 1.6 q m 3 /h 3000 4000 00 0. 0.5 1 3 4 5 C r/min 3400 3000 600 00 1800 B 1400 1000 1400 1800 00 E 600 3000 3400 r/min 100 160 00 40 Pa 55 J A =0.0kgm 60 η,% A D 90 67 95 60 40 0.5 1 3 4 5 6 P M,kW p a p b +p d 10 0 30 40 100 00 300 400 Pa Pa

INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL OF FANS WITH BACKWARD-CURVED BLADES Page 160 Control principle Operation with two-speed motor The sensor (1) measures the controlled variable (e.g. the air flow rate or air pressure). This reading is compared in the controller () with a preset value (set point) which is either constant or variable. In the event of deviation from the set point, a signal will be applied to the actuator (3) which will reset the pitch of the inlet guide vanes until the controlled variable corresponds to the set point. Operation with single-speed motor ) 3) High speed 1) ) 1) Total pressure rise Low speed C B β 3 β β 1 A α 1 α α 3 Air flow rate 3) β 3β β 1 Power demand α 3 α α 1 Total pressure rise Power demand B E α α Air flow rate An inlet guide vane control assembly is fitted to each of the fan inlets, and the two are interconnected by means of a common control lever. When the flow rate is reduced, the guide vanes cause the incoming air to spin. As a result, the amount of energy that the impeller must supply to the air is reduced, and the pressure and power points on the fan characteristics are therefore lowered. In order to lower the air flow rate from A to B, the guide vane pitch angle is thus altered from 1 to, thus causing the power demand to drop from D to E. The efficiency of a fan with inlet guide vane control is maintained at a high level throughout the control range. A D α 1 α 1 If inlet guide vane control is employed in combination with a two-speed motor or two separate motors, the fan will be controlled in the high speed range between A and B. At B, the fan is switched over to the low speed and the inlet guide vanes are opened fully. Control will then continue along the curve between B and C. This highly energy-efficient method of control results in a simple and automatic method of control using standard control components. N.B. The low speed should not be below 60 70% of the high speed. In the case of two-speed motor, a speed relationship of 1:1.5 is recommended, i.e. a 4/6-pole motor. Single-speed or two-speed operation Recommended fan motors for single-speed and twospeed operation with inlet guide vane control: Max. design air flow rate m 3 /s 8 Average annual air flow rate Type Fan motor Lowest mimimum air flow rate >55% Single-speed motor approx. 0% <55% Two-speed motor, 1:1.5 speed ratio approx. 10% >60% Single-speed motor approx. 0% Two-speed motor, >8 <60% with 1:1.5 speed approx. 10% ratio or two singlespeed motors

INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL OF FANS WITH BACKWARD-CURVED BLADES Page 161 Example The air flow rate delivered by an EULB 40 fan with inlet guide vane control is to be controlled between a maximum of 4.8 m 3 /s and a minimum of 3.0 m 3 /s. The total pressure rise is to be 1700 and 900 Pa respectively. What will be the power demand and the sound power level at maximum and minimum air flow rates. SOLUTION AIR FLOW RATE max. min. Air flow rate, m 3 /s 4.8 3 Total pressure rise, Pa 1700 900 Pressure drop with the guide vanes fully open, Pa 140 55 Total pressure rise necessary, Pa 1840 955 Plot the corresponding points A and B in the fan chart. Read the speed at point A and plot the power demand (point D). The speed is constant, 1/min 3000 3000 Points A and B are not on the same operating line. Draw a fictitious operating line through B and intersecting the speed curve for 3000 r/min at point C, which corresponds to a fictitious air flow rate and a fictitious power demand (point E) Fictitious air flow rate, m 3 /s - 4.5 Fictitious power demand, kw - 11.8 Points B and C are on the same operating line. The chart below can now be used for the power demand. Air flow rate in % of the fictitious 100 3 x 100=67 air flow rate 4.5 Power demand, %, from chart below 100 59 (from adjacent chart) Actual power demand, kw 11.8 0.59x11.8 7 Total sound power level, Lwt to the inlet or outlet duct (points A and C), db 101 101 Results. The calculations show that the power demand at maximum air flow rate is 11.8 kw and at the minimum air flow rate, it is 7 kw, to which the power losses in the belt drive must be added. The total sound power level in both cases is 101 db. EULB 40- p d 4000 3000 000 1000 0 10 00 Lwt,dB 86 90 94 98 100 0.5 m 3 /s 3 4 5 6 6.5 q m 3 /h 8000 1000 16000 0000 0.5 1 1400 1 10 18 p a p b +p d p g 1800 10 0 60 100 140 180 0 00 600 700 r/min 3000 3400 75 5 10 0 30 40 60 100 00 300 400 0 60 100 160 00 40 Power demand of the EULB fan with inlet guide vane control 75 70 The chart below shows the power demand at various air flow rates when inlet guide vane control is employed and the fan runs at constant speed. The chart is applicable to control along the same operating line. The air flow and power demand are specified in percent of the air flow and power demand when the inlet guide vanes are fully open. Power Leistungsbedarf demand, % % 570 p t,pa P,kW 600 100 80 60 59 max 700 600 1800 1400 r/min 3000 00 max 3400 J A =0.5kgm J B =0.5kgm B 80 84 Es C A η,% D 80 Pa 60 40 10 0 Pa Pa Pa P M,kW 67 40 0 0 40 60 80 100 Air Volumenstrom flow rate, % %

Page 16 SPEED CONTROL OF FANS Control principle The sensor (1) measures the controlled variable (e.g. the air flow rate or air pressure). This reading is compared in the controller () with a preset variable (set point) which is either constant or variable. In the event of a deviation from the set point, a signal will be applied to the speed controller (3) which will adjust the fan speed until the controlled variable corresponds to the set point. Either a voltage regulator or a frequency converter can be used as speed controller. Both are described below. Total pressure rise, p t System Unstable range when the fan is on speed control curve q Air flow rate, q Total pressure rise Power demand B E Operation n n 3) ) Air flow rate On a change in fan speed from n1 to n, the operating point will be displaced along the operating line from A to B, and the power demand will then change from D to E. N.B. On a reduction in air flow rate, make sure that the operating point will not be in the unstable range of the fan. This is particularly important in the case of VAV systems see the figure at the top right. A D n 1 n 1 1) Speed control by means of a voltage regulator Speed control by adjustment of the supply voltage to the motor is recommended only for direct driven fans, in an arrangement in which the fan, special motor and voltage regulator are tested together. Speed control by means of a frequency converter Modern frequency converters with fast IGBT transistors which allow for high switching frequencies reduce the noise from the controlled motors to levels that are acceptable for air handling systems. Speed control by means of a frequency converter involves very low energy consumption for the motor drive also as regards the reactive power. The power factor cos ϕ on the supply side is almost 1 and is also high on the motor side, since the motor voltage is adjusted to the load. In order to avoid mechanical resonance in the combination of fan and motor, the frequency converter design selected should allow for the exclusion of a number of frequency ranges. If a frequency converter with a built-in PI controller is used, this can take over the duties of the control unit. Although most frequency converters incorporate motor protection, it is advisable to incorporate overheating protection in the motor windings. The regulations concerning mains and radio interference must be met in the installation work. In certain cases, further filters and chokes, in addition to those incorporated into the frequency converter, may therefore be necessary. The instructions of the manufacturer concerning the run and earthing of metallically sheathed cables must be observed. The mains and radio interference demands are particularly strict in residential and hospital systems and in environments in which computer and other electronic equipment are in use.

CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL Page 163 Inlet guide vane control is usually employed for maintaining the in-duct pressure constant in VAV systems.the air flow is then controlled by means of flow variators or dampers in the system. Since the pressure is usually maintained constant in both the supply air and the exhaust air ducts, VAV systems usually require one pressure control system for the supply air and one for the exhaust air. However, the inlet guide vanes can be controlled by sensors other than pressure sensors, such as temperature, humidity or velocity sensors. Locations of sensors A good fan control system demands that the sensors are located in the right places. Main rules The supply air pressure sensor should be located immediately upstream of the flow control damper which is nearest to the unit. (The first supply air terminal unit is usually critical from the pressure drop aspect.) The exhaust air pressure sensor should be located at the flow variator which is furthest away from the unit. (The last exhaust air terminal unit is usually critical from the pressure drop aspect.) N.B. A pressure sensor must never be located immediately downstream of a fan outlet. Simpler systems In the case of simpler systems without flow control dampers in the exhaust air, the exhaust air fan may be controlled in parallel with the supply air fan. However, in such cases, minor discrepancies between the supply and exhaust air flow rates will have to be accepted, since the fans then operate with different pressure drops and thus along different system curves. Ready-made diagrams for such operating cases are available on request from Fläkt Woods. To facilitate adjustment, the air handling unit should be equipped with a flow measuring device. Descriptions and diagrams Descriptions, adjustment instructions, and air flow and circuit diagrams for the most common control cases are presented here. For other operating conditions, the advice of Fläkt Woods should be obtained. Makes of control equipment The connection of components may vary somewhat between different makes of equipment. It is therefore always important to obtain the appropriate diagrams from the manufacturer of the control equipment. Improved starting conditions for the fan When the fan is stopped, the system will be depressurized and the pressure sensor will move the guide vanes towards the open position. As a result, the fan normally starts with the guide vanes fully open. The starting current and the starting time of the fan can be reduced if the guide vanes are closed when the fan is started. For this purpose, the control equipment described on the following pages can be provided with an additional function which keeps the guide vanes fully closed during the whole of the starting process. Single-speed operation pressure control of a fan Operation Pressure sensor GP controls the guide vanes of fan F across control unit RC and actuator ST so that the required static pressure will be obtained in the duct in which the sensor is located. SUPPLY AIR: The guide vanes open on a decrease in pressure in the duct and close on an increase in pressure. EXHAUST AIR: The guide vanes open on a decrease in negative pressure in the duct and close on an increase in negative pressure. GP ST RC F F RC Connection diagram for the supply air ST Connection diagram for the exhaust air GP 4 V GP RC ST Wiring diagram GP = Pressure sensor RC = Control unit ST = Electric actuator with adjustable limit positions F = Fan with inlet guide vane control Adjustment The limit positions of the actuator and any linkage between the actuator and the guide vane control lever should be adjusted so that the guide vanes can easily be reset between the open and closed positions.

CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL Page 164 Two-speed operation pressure control of a fan operation Selector switch FO is used for selecting manual operation (position 1 or ) or automatic operation (position 3) with low or high fan speed. Manual operation is used in circumstances such as when adjusting the system. When selector switch FO is in position 3, the system is started automatically via timeswitch GX. Contacts FO4 are closed only when FO is in position 3 and inhibit the energizing of TR1 on manual operation. Inlet guide vane control Pressure sensor GP controls the inlet guide vanes in fan F via control unit RC and actuator ST so that the required static pressure will be obtained in the duct in which the sensor is located. SUPPLY AIR: The guide vanes open on a decrease in pressure in the duct and close on an increase in pressure. EXHAUST AIR: The guide vanes open on a decrease in vacuum in the duct and close on an increase in vacuum. Auxiliary contacts A and B in relays TO1 and TO control switching between high and low fan speeds. Starting the fan and automatic switching between high and low speeds Selector switch FO must be in position 3, and contacts FO4 will then be closed. The guide vanes are initially open and auxiliary contacts A and B are closed. When GX closes, time-delay relay TR will be energized. After about 10 s, contacts TR:1 will close and the fan will start at low speed. If the pressure in the duct is too high, actuator ST will move the guide vanes in the closing direction at the appropriate operating point. Auxiliary contacts A will open as soon as the guide vanes have started closing. On the other hand, if the pressure in the duct is too low, the guide vanes will remain in the open position. After about 10 seconds, contacts TR3:1 will close, and contacts TR1:1 and TR1: of TR1 will close and TR1:3 will open. The fan will then switch over to high speed. Since the pressure will then probably be too high, actuator ST will move the guide vanes in the closing direction at the appropriate operating point. When the guide vanes begin to close, auxiliary contacts A will open while auxiliary contacts B will remain closed and TR1 will close its holding circuit across TR1:1. When the inlet guide vanes have closed to such an extent that the air flow is below the value at which the fan changes over from low speed to high speed, auxiliary contacts B will open. Tripping of time-delay relay TR1 is delayed, and its contacts thus remain in the same position for around 10 s. If auxiliary contacts B are still open after this delay, TR1:1 and TR1: will open and TR1:3 will close. After a further delay of approx. 10 s via TR, low speed will be switched in. When the inlet guide vanes open again due to the pressure being too low, switching back to the high speed will be delayed via TR3 in the same manner as described above for the starting process.

Page 165 CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL Auxiliary contacts A and B Auxiliary contacts A and B should be controlled by a signal corresponding to the setting of the actuator. It must be possible to adjust individually the points at which A and B open. Symbols used GP = Pressure sensor ST = Actuator with adjustable limit positions RC = Control unit TO1, TO = Voltage relays A, B = Auxiliary contacts in voltage relays TO1 and TO respectively TR1 = Time-delay relay with delayed tripping (0 00 s), with normally open and 1 normally closed pairs of contacts TR = Time-delay relay with delayed tripping (0 30 s), with 1 normally open pair of contacts TR3 = Time-delay relay with delayed tripping (0 00 s), with 1 normally open pair of contacts GX = Timeswitch or equivalent PK = Pole-changing switch (drawn for separate windings) K1 = Contactor for low speed K = Contactor for high speed FO = Selector switch Position 0 = System OFF Position 1 = Manual operation, low speed Position = Manual operation, high speed Position 3 = Automatic operation FO4 = Separate contacts in FO, closed in position 3 F = Fan with inlet guide vane control TO1 TO ST RC RC ST TO TO1 GP GP F F PK Supply air connections diagram PK Exhaust air connections 0 V 4 V TR3 RC ST GP TO1 KR1 TO KR3:1 FO KR1:1 3 0 1 GX TR1: PK K TR:1 K1 FO4 TR TR1:3 Wiring diagram

Page 166 CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR INLET GUIDE VANE CONTROL Adjustment of guide vane control on two-speed operation General The limit positions of the actuator and the linkage, if any, between the actuator and the inlet guide vane control lever should be adjusted so that the guide vanes can easily be reset between the open and closed positions. Adjust the two fan speeds to the specified level. When the system calls for maximum air flow rate, the fan should deliver this with the guide vanes in the fully open position and the fan running at maximum speed. To prevent continuous switching between the two fan speeds, switching from high speed to low speed should take place at a somewhat lower air flow rate than switching from low speed to high speed. If necessary, adjust auxiliary contacts A and B. Setting the switching point between high and low fan speeds (setting of auxiliary contacts A and B) 1. Preset the required pressure set point (design value).. Start the fan manually at low speed. 3. Set all throttling dampers in the system to such positions that the inlet guide vanes of the fan will be practically fully open. In a system that has many thermostats, this can best be done by setting all thermostats, with a suitable distribution, to either the maximum or the minimum set point. Make sure that the throttling dampers remain in the positions to which they had been set throughout the adjustment process. 4. Increase the set point for pressure control to exactly the point at which the guide vanes are fully open. In this position, auxiliary contacts A and B should be closed. 5. Measure the static pressure in the duct at a point in the vicinity of the fan where the flow is stable and where the reading obtained is as high as possible. Make a note of this reading, since it will be used as reference value for the air flow rate. As an alternative, the static pressure drop across the heat exchanger, for instance, could also be used as the reference value. 6. Select manual operation at high fan speed. The guide vanes should then close automatically to a position which gives the same reference pressure (air flow) as in 5. above. Then reduce the set point for pressure control by such an amount that the measured reference value (pressure) will be approx. 5% lower. Adjust the auxiliary contacts B so that they open in this position of the inlet guide vanes. 7. Preset the set point for pressure control to the required value. 8. Reset the throttling dampers that were set to fixed positions as described in 3. above to the normal settings, e.g. by resetting all room thermostats to the specified set points. 9. Reset the selector switch to automatic operation. Presetting the time-delay relays Set TR1 and TR3 to approx. 10 s and TR to approx. 10 s.

Page 167 FAN STARTING METHODS This section describes the various starting methods used for fans, and the method of calculating the starting time. The starting time is used for two checks: that the permissible starting time of the motor is not exceeded, and that the overload protection does not trip during the starting process. There are two ways of shortening the starting time without the need for over-rating the motor: Starting with the inlet guide vanes closed. Starting the throttling damper closed (NOT on axial-flow fans). Selection of motor and starter Use the procedure illustrated below to select the motor and starter: Fan power demand Direct on-line starting of single-speed motors The simplest method of starting a squirrel-cage induction motor is to connect the mains voltage directly to the stator winding. Only a direct on-line starter switch is then needed. However, due to the high starting current when direct on-line starting is employed, there are certain limitations for this method of starting. Electricity utilities do not usually allow direct on-line starting of squirrel-cage induction motors rated in excess of 3 5 kw. However, exemptions can often be obtained, and this opportunity should always be utilized, if available. Subscribers connected to high-voltage systems usually determine their own power limits for direct on-line starting. If the current-time curve for the overload protection (starter) shows that the motor protection would trip due to the starting time being too long, either a motor with a higher rating or a starter with equipment for heavy starting can be selected. Transmission losses Motor power demand Select the motor Select the method of starting Direct on-line or star-delta starting Calculate the starting time for operation Starting time too long Check the permissible starting time for the motor Equipment for heavy starting Starting time too long Select the starter Check the tripping time for the overload protection

FAN STARTING METHODS Page 168 Star-delta starting of single-speed motors Star-delta starting should be employed only if direct on-line starting is not permissible. The motor should then be wound for the mains voltage when in delta connection, e.g. 415 V delta. The starter used must be a star-delta starter which connects the motor windings in star during the initial part of the starting process. When the motor is in star connection, the phase voltage is reduced in the ratio of 1: 3, e.g. 415 V: 40 V. As a result, the starting current is reduced to approx. 30% and the starting torque to 5% of the corresponding value during direct on-line starting. For star-delta starting, make certain that the torque curve of the motor when in star connection is above the fan torque curve up to 90% of the rated speed. Due to this requirement, star-delta starting usually demands a motor with a higher rating than that needed for direct on-line starting. If no motor torque curves are available, which is usually the case, the lowest necessary motor rating can be calculated with adequate accuracy from the following expression: P Y/D =,6 M max M P f where Starting and control of two speed motors If two-speed control of the fan is employed, the fan is normally driven by a two-speed motor which can be run at two different speeds by pole switching. A pole selector switch is used for starting and switching between two different number of poles (speeds) The two common types of two-speed motors are as follows: Motors with separate stator windings (e.g. type ATAM 4/6 pole motors). Motors with switchable stator windings, known as Dahlander connection (e.g. type ARAM /4 or 4/8 pole motors). The design of the pole selector switch is dependent on the motor type. N.B. Star-delta starting cannot normally be employed on two-speed motors. Motor protection (overcurrent trip) The motor protection is designed to protect the motor against harmful overcurrents. The protection usually consists of a bimetal switch integrated into the starter. In the event of overcurrent, the two bimetal strips will be heated up and, when the limit temperature is reached, will open the circuit and interrupt the power supply to the motor. PY/D Pf Mmax M minimum motor rating for which star-delta starting can be employed power demand of the fan at rated speed (including belt drive losses) ratio of maximum torque to normal torque of the motor. Setting of motor protection The motor protection should be set as follows: For direct on-line starting using a motor protection switch or pole selector switch, the motor protection should be set for the rated current of the motor. In the case of star-delta starting, the motor protection should be set to the phase current which is equal to the rated current of the motor divided by 3 (by approx. 1.73).

FAN STARTING METHODS Page 169 Equipment for heavy starting Starting of a motor with a particularly long starting time may cause tripping of the motor protection during the starting process. To prevent this, the motor protection can be supplemented with equipment for heavy starting which switches out the bimetal switch during the starting process. Another possibility is to supply the bimetal switch across under-rated current transformers which run at saturation and thus restrict the current through the bimetal switch. Phase failure protection A three-phase motor can be damaged by loss of one phase, and the motor protection should therefore incorporate phase failure protection. This is based on a differential function in the overcurrent relay which causes tripping in the event of differences between the phase currents, i.e. in the event of loss of one phase. Starting time general The starting time is used for two checks, i.e. that the permissible starting time of the motor is not exceeded and that the motor protection does not trip during the starting process. There is one way of shortening the starting time of a fan motor without the need for over-rating the motor: - Starting with the inlet guide vanes closed. To calculate the starting time for direct on-line starting Use the following formula: The calculated starting time is the time for accelerating the fan from rest to full speed. To calculate the starting time for star delta starting. Use the following formula: t = t = The calculated starting time is the time during which the star-delta starter must be in star connection for the fan to reach approx. 90% of full speed, whereupon it switches over to delta connection. For star-delta starting, a check must also be made to ensure that the motor torque curve is higher than the fan torque curve during the star connection period. The lowest possible motor rating for star-delta starting can be calculated by means of the following expression. P Y/D = J n f 10-3 M max M st 46 P + P M M f J n f 10-3 1 M max 1 M st 46 P + P 3 M 4 M f,6 M max M P f To calculate the starting time: a) When the motor is selected, its rating P must suit the power demand Pf of the fan at the normal operating point (i.e. inlet guide vanes/damper open). b) In the formula for calculating the starting time, assume that the value of Pf is equal to the power demand of the fan when the inlet guide vanes/damper is closed. P P 1) f Symbols used = motor rating... kw = power demand of the fan at rated speed (including belt drive losses, if any).....kw P Y/D = lowest motor rating for which star-delta starting is possible.... kw Mst 3) = ratio of starting torque to normal torque of the motor M Mmax 3) = ratio of maximum torque to normal torque of the motor M n f = rated speed of fan... r/min J ) = moment of inertia of the system referred to the fan shaft.... kgm t = starting time... s 1) Corresponds to the PM value specified in certain catalogue sections. ) The moment of inertia of the fan impeller is specified in the fan charts, and the moment of inertia of the rotor can generally be ignored. 3) Information concerning type APAM, ATAM and ARAM motors is given in the section B 3818.

FAN STARTING METHODS Page 170 Checking the permissible motor starting time The maximum permissible starting time is dependent on the motor size and the number of poles, and may vary from one make of motor to the next. The permissible starting times for ABB motors are tabulated below and are applicable to individual starting occasions with the motor cold. If the calculated starting time is too long, select a bigger size and calculate its starting time. Maximum starting time, s, for an individual start Motor size Starting method Number of poles 4 6 8 63 5 40 40 71 0 0 40 40 80 Direct on-line starting 15 0 40 40 90 10 0 35 40 100 10 15 30 40 11 Direct on-line starting 1 15 0 5 Star-delta starting 36 45 60 75 13 Direct on-line starting 1 1 0 5 Star-delta starting 36 36 60 75 160-5 Direct on-line starting 15 15 0 0 Star-delta starting 45 45 60 60-355 Direct on-line starting 15 15 0 0 Star-delta starting 45 45 60 60 In most cases, it should be possible to start the motor immediately after it has stopped. It is therefore recommended that only one third of the starting time tabulated above should be utilized. Checking the tripping time of the motor protection The tripping time of the motor protection during starting is given graphically by means of current/time curves. The tripping time may vary with the type and make of motor protection. The chart below shows typical current/time curves. The ratio of starting current to normal operating current (Ist/I), also known as multiple of setting current is given on the x axis. The value of Ist/I for type APAM, ATAM and ARAM motors is specified in the catalogue section B. The tripping time in seconds can be read on the y axis. Two curves are normally plotted in the current/time chart, one of them being for the relay in cold condition and one for the relay in hot condition, after continuous operation at the preset current. In order to ensure that the overcurrent relay is adequately rated for restarting at short intervals, the tripping time should be read from the curve for the relay in hot condition. During star-delta starting by means of a star-delta starter, the starting current during the star connection period will be lower, and the value of Ist/I must be multiplied by 0.6 before the chart is read. If the overcurrent relay should trip due to an excessively long starting time, either a bigger motor or a starter with equipment for heavy starting may be selected. 10 100 80 60 40 0 Tripping time, s 10 8 6 4 1 1 3 4 5 10 Multiple of setting current (lst/l) *) Example of current/time curves for the motor protection Cold condition, maximum and minimum values... Hot condition, mean value *) If a star-delta starter is used, the Ist/I value of the motor must be multiplied by 0.6 before the chart is read.

ACOUSTIC DATA Page 171 Acoustic data, db The total sound power level Lwt to the outlet duct can be read from each fan chart. The following formula can be used for breaking down the total sound power level into octave bands: Lw = Lwt + Kok Kok can be read from the tables below. Symbols used: Lw = Sound power level, db (ref. 10 1 W) Lwt = Total sound power level (from chart)...db Kok = Correction factor...db EULB fan Correction factor Kok, db (backward curved blades) To the outlet duct Fan speed Octave band, centre frequency, Hz r/min 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000-10 -7-7 -6-8 -9-11 -18-4 11-0 -8-8 -9-6 -7-10 -14-19 0-40 -8-7 -11-6 -7-9 -14-18 To the inlet duct Fan speed Octave band, centre frequency, Hz r/min 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000-10 -5-10 -5-9 -9-1 -16-0 11-0 -7-1 -9-5 -8-9 -13-19 1-40 -7-11 -1-5 -7-8 -1-18 EULF fan Correction factor Kok, db (forward curved blades) To the outlet duct Fan speed Octave band, centre frequency, Hz r/min 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000-800 - -8-9 -1-11 -14-16 -1 801-1800 -3-9 -10-10 -11-14 -16-1 1801-4 -4-8 -9-11 -11-1 -14-19 To the inlet duct Fan speed Octave band, centre frequency, Hz r/min 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000-800 -7-6 -7-8 -8-1 -15-1 801-1800 -9-8 -8-7 -8-1 -15-1 1801-4 -10-8 -8-9 -8-9 -13-17 Transmission loss through the casing on enclosed installation. EULB fan Correction factor Kok, db Size 11 33 Fan speed Octave band, centre frequency, Hz r/min 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000-10 -17-4 -8-4 -45-48 - -55 11-0 -19-6 -3-38 -44-45 -47-54 1-40 -19-5 -35-38 -43-44 -46-53 EULF fan Correction factor Kok, db Size 11 33 Fan speed Octave band, centre frequency, Hz r/min 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000-800 -19-0 -30-41 -44-48 -49-56 801-1800 -1 - -31-40 -44-48 -49-56 1801-4 - - -31-4 -44-45 -47-5 Size 40 53 Fan speed Octave band, centre frequency, Hz r/min 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000-10 -0-6 -31-44 -48 - -5-57 11-0 - -8-35 -40-47 -47-49 -56 1-40 - -7-38 -40-46 -46-48 -55 Size 40 53 Fan speed Octave band, centre frequency, Hz r/min 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000-800 - - -33-43 -47 - -51-58 801-1800 -4-4 -34-4 -47 - -51-58 1801-4 -5-4 -34-44 -47-47 -49-54 Example The sound power level Lw per octave band to the plant room can be calculated as described below. Given: Fan EULF--, fan speed = 600 rpm, Lwt = 90 db Use correction factors Kok to devide the total sound power level into octave bands. Reduce the total sound power levels in each octave band by the Kok value for the given fan speed and unit size. Octave band, frequency, Hz 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000 Lwt 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Kok - - -33-43 -47 - -51-58 Lw to plant room 68 68 57 47 43 40 39 3

ACOUSTIC DATA Page 17 Insertion loss for other unit sections, db Octave band, centre frequency, Hz Unit section 63 15 0 1000 000 4000 8000 EUPA, EUPD pleated filter 1 1 1 1 1 1 EUP(B,C) bag filter EU 3 (G 85) 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 EU 5 (F 45) 4 7 10 11 11 EU 6 (F 65) 3 3 4 6 7 9 13 15 EU 7 (F 85) 3 3 4 6 7 9 13 15 EU 8 (F 95) 3 3 4 6 7 9 13 15 EU 9 (F 95) 3 3 4 6 7 9 13 15 Prefilter 1 1 1 1 1 1 EUEM, EUES air heater 1 1 1 1 4 4 EUML 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EUMK 1 1 1 1 4 4 electric heater EUM(N,P) air cooler b = 1 1 3 6 b = 3 3 1 3 5 8 b = 4 4 1 1 4 6 9 b = 6 6 3 3 4 6 8 11 b = 8 7 3 4 4 5 7 9 1 b = 1 9 5 6 6 7 9 11 14 EUQA humidifier 3 3 5 6 1 15 EUMF REGOTERM rotary heat exchanger 3 4 4 3 4 5 6 9

Unit size 3 9 3 560 p t,pa P,kW 600 4000 3000 000 1000 0 00 10 98 Lwt,dB 86 90 94 100 0.5 m 3 /s 3 4 5 6 q 1 m 3 /h 6000 8000 1000 16000 0000 0.5 1 1 1400 10 18 p d 4 1400 1800 1800 10 0 40 60 80 100 160 00 r/min max 700 600 00 00 r/min 3000 600 700 3000 J A =0.5kgm J B =0.5kgm max 3400 FAN CHART 3400 8 13 75 80 84 14 5 η,% 80 6 Pa 75 70 60 40 10 0 P M,kW 7 Page 173 10 p a 5 10 0 30 40 Pa 11 p b +p d 0 60 100 140 00 300 Pa 1 p g 0 40 60 80 100 140 00 Pa The EU fan charts on the following pages are valid for air with a density of 1. kg/m 3. 1 = Air flow, m 3 /s (x-axis) = Air flow, m 3 /h (x-axis) 3 = Total pressure, Pa (y-axis) 4 = Fan speed, r/min (RPM) 5 = Fan efficiency, % 6 = Sound power level, db (dotted) 7 = Fan shaft power, kw 8 = Mass moment of inertia, kg/m 9 = Indication of unit sizes 10 = Pressure losses to standardized outlet duct, Pa, Pa 11 = Pressure losses through distributor section, Pb, Pa 1 = Pressure losses in inlet guide vanes for fans with backward-curved blades, Pg, Pa. The appropriate pressure loss(es) above should be added to external and internal pressure drops before entering the fan charts. 13 = Recommended working range of the fan 14 = Working range for reinforced fans

Unit size 0 Fan size EULB-0- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 174 Fan EULB-0--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 90 p t,pa 1800 1000 800 600 400 00 DIN 4166 Class 40 70 73 4000 70 η,% 30 60 3000 0 40 LwA,dB 75 80 85 90 000 r/min r/min kη 40 1 4000.993 30.983 3000.967 0.943 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 3) 01 0 03 04 05 06 08 Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 1) 1) P,kW 300 000.901 0. 0.6 1 1.4m 3 /s q v 1000 000 3000 4000 00m 3 /h 0.05 0.1 0. 1 1.8 000 0 J = 0.03 kgm 0. 3000 0.4 30 4000 0.6 0.8 1 40 1.4 r/min 1.8. p d 10 0 60 100 140 180 Pa P M,kW Belt drive EULT-0--c-d-eeee p a p b + p d 10 0 30 40 60 70 Pa 60 100 00 300 Pa Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) LwA K = LwA + db Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 13S. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 0 Fan size 3 EULB-0-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 175 Fan EULB-0-3-3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 30 p t,pa 00 000 1000 0 00 000 0 10 3000 30 r/min 4000 40 75 76 75 η,% DIN 4166 Class LwA,dB 75 80 85 90 95 70 60 40 r/min kη 40 1 4000.995 30.989 3000.979 0.963 000.935 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 3) 01 0 03 04 1) 1) 05 06 08 P,kW 100 0. 0.6 1 1.4 1.8 m 3 /s q v 000 4000 6000 m 3 /h 0.05 0.1 0.1 10 J = 0.05 kgm 0. 0. 000 0 10.879 P M,kW Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 400 1.5 3 p d 3000 1 30 4000 40 r/min.5 3 10 30 100 00 40 Pa Belt drive EULT-0-3-c-d-eeee p a 10 0 40 60 80 10 160 p b + p d 40 100 00 300 Pa Pa Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) LwA K = LwA + db Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 13M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 0 Fan size EULF-0- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 176 Fan EULF-0--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) EULV-0--c-d-eeee 80 p t,pa P,kW 300 400 000 1000 0 00 1000 Lwt,dB 80 100 0.5 m 3 /s 1 1.4 q m 3 /h 3000 4000 00 0. 0.5 1 3 4 5 p d p a B E 1000 1400 1800 00 600 3000 3400 r/min J A =0.0kgm p b +p d Motor r/min 3400 C 3000 600 00 1800 1400 EULF-0-/GXAF-5-0 100 180 55 See section B 3818 η,% 60 10 0 30 40 85 A D 100 00 300 95 90 Pa 67 60 40 0.5 1 3 4 5 6 Pa Pa P M,kW APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 13S. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 1 Fan size EULB-1- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 177 Fan EULB-1--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flor meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) 360 p t,pa 400 000 1000 0 00 100 1800 r/min 400 4000 3800 3600 3400 300 3000 800 600 400 00 000 75 0. 0.6 1 1.4 1.8..6m 3 /s 76 75 η,% DIN 4166 Class LwA,dB 75 80 85 90 95 70 60 40 r/min kη 400 1 4000.998 3800.996 3600.994 3400.991 300.988 3000.984 800.98 600.974 400.967 00.958 000.947 1800.93 Cross section of inlet 3) 1) 01 0 03 04 05 06 1) 08 Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand P,kW 400 0. 1 3 4 p d q v 000 4000 6000 8000 m 3 /h 1800 000 00 400 600 800 3000 300 3400 3600 3800 4000 400 r/min J = 0.08 kgm 10 30 100 00 60 Pa 0. 1 3 4 P M,kW 1) Connection to EU-section p a 10 0 40 60 80 10 Pa p b + p d 40 100 00 300 400 Pa Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULT-1--c-d-eeee p g LwA K = LwA + db 100 00 300 400 0 600 Pa Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 13M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 1 Fan size 3 EULB-1-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 178 Fan EULB-1-3-3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) 404 p t,pa 400 000 1000 0 00 100 1600 000 1800 400 00 800 600 300 3000 r/min 3600 3400 75 0. 0.6 1 1.4 1.8..6 3 3.m 3 /s 77 DIN 4166 Class 75 η,% 70 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 60 40 r/min kη 3600 1 3400.999 300.997 3000.995 800.99 600.989 400.985 00.981 000.974 1800.966 1600.954 Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand Cross section of inlet 3) 01 0 03 04 05 06 08 1) 1) P,kW 0 0. 1 3 4 5 p d q v 000 4000 6000 8000 10000 m 3 /h 1600 J = 0.14 kgm 1800 000 00 1 400 600 800 3000 300 3400 3 4 3600 r/min 5 10 30 100 00 40Pa P M,kW 1) Connection to EU-section p a 10 0 40 60 80 10 Pa p b + p d 40 100 00 300 Pa Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULT-1-3-c-d-eeee p g LwA K = LwA + db 100 00 300 400 Pa Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 13M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 1 Fan size EULF-1- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 179 Fan EULF-1--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV-1--c-d-eeee 360 400 p t,pa P,kW 600 000 1000 0 00 100 0.4 1 3 m 3 /s q v 000 3000 4000 00 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 m 3 /h 0.1 0. 0.3 0.5 1 3 4 5 6 7 p d p a r/min 700 600 400 00 000 1800 1600 1400 100 1000 800 800 1000 100 1400 1600 1800 000 00 400 600 700 r/min p b + p d 0 30 100 160 00 300 LwA K = LwA + db 60 LwA,dB 75 80 0 40 60 80 100 140 180 0 100 00 300 400 0 700 85 DIN 4166 Class 65 η,% 90 60 J = 0.06 kgm 40 30 0.5 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pa Pa Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 13M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 180 Unit size Fan size EULB-- Fan EULB---3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter 404 00 000 1000 p d 10 0 40 60 80 100 140 70 75 80 max= 3600 83 η,% 300 80 r/min 75 800 70 400 60 Pa Material (e) 1 = galvanized 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 3) 01 0 03 04 05 06 08 Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 1) 1) p t,pa P,kW 0 0 00 100 Lwt,dB 85 90 95 100 0. m3/s 1.6 q m 3 /h 3000 00 7000 9000 0. 1600 1 3 4 000 1600 000 r/min 400 800 300 3600 J A =0.09kgm 40 0.5 1 3 4 4.5 P M,kW Belt drive EULT---c-d-eeee p a 10 0 30 40 60 80 100 Pa Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts p b +p d p g 0 100 00 0 100 00 300 Pa Pa Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 13M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size Fan size 3 EULB--3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 181 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB--3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 1) 04 1) 05 06 08 360 x 455 0 p t,pa P,kW 4000 3000 000 1000 0 10 00 100 0.5 1 3 4 5 5.5m 3 /s q v 000 4000 6000 8000 10000 1000 14000 16000 18000 m 3 /h 0.5 10 J 0.4 kgm 1 1 000 4 8 1 p d 000 0 0 3000 r/min max 4000 30 max 3300 3000 75 75.5 0 40 100 00 300 400 0 600 75 LwA,dB 84 88 9 96 3300 30 4000 r/min η,% DIN 4166 Class 1 70 100 60 40 r/min kη 4000 1 30.998 3000.994 0.989 000.979 10.958 6 1 14 Pa P M,kW p a 30 40 60 80 100 00 300 400 Pa Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand p b + p d 100 00 300 400 600 800 1000 p g 60 100 00 300 400 600 800 1000 Pa Pa 1) Connection to EU-section LwA K = LwA + db Belt drive EULT--3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 160M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size Fan size EULF-- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 18 Fan EULF---3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV---c-d-eeee 404 p t,pa P,kW 0 400 000 1000 0 00 100 0.5 1 3 4 m 3 /s q v 4000 6000 8000 10000 1000 14000 m 3 /h 0. 0.4 1 3 4 5 10 p d p a r/min 400 00 000 1800 1600 1400 100 1000 800 800 1000 100 1400 1600 1800 000 00 400 r/min p b + p d 0 40 100 00 300 3 LwA K = LwA + db 60 LwA,dB 75 80 η,% 85 65 DIN 4166 Class 40 60 80 100 1 00 300 3 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 800 66 90 65 J = 0.10 kgm 60 40 0.6 1 3 4 5 10 1 Pa Pa Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 13M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 183 Unit size 30 Fan size EULB-30- Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-30--c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive EULT-30--c-d-eeee 404 p t,pa P,kW 0 00 000 1000 0 00 100 Lwt,dB 85 90 95 100 0. m 3 /s 1.6 q m 3 /h 3000 00 7000 9000 0. 1600 1 3 4 p d p a p b +p d p g r/min 000 1600 000 r/min 10 0 40 60 80 100 140 70 max= 3600 400 400 800 800 300 300 3600 J A =0.10kgm 75 80 83 η,% 10 0 30 40 60 80 100 0 100 00 0 100 00 300 80 75 70 60 40 Pa 0.5 1 3 4 4.5 Pa Pa Pa P M,kW Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 13M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 30 Fan size 3 EULB-30-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 184 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-30-3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) 454 p t,pa P,kW 4000 3000 000 1000 0 00 100 10 000 0 3000 r/min max 4000 30 max 3300 75 79 η,% 0.5 1 3 4 5 5.5m 3 /s q v 000 4000 6000 8000 10000 1000 14000 16000 18000 m 3 /h 0.5 10 J = 0.4 kgm 1 1 000 0 75 70 LwA,dB 84 88 9 96 100 DIN 4166 Class 1 60 40 r/min kη 4000 30 3000 0 000 10 1 P M,kW.998.994.988.978.956 Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 4 8 3000 3300 30 6 05 06 08 1) 0 1 4000 r/min p d 10 0 40 100 00 300 400 1 14 Pa Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section p a p b + p d 40 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 Pa p g 40 60 80100 00 300 400 0 600 700Pa LwA K = LwA + db 0 30 40 60 80 100 00 Pa Belt drive EULT-30-3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 160M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 30 Fan size EULF-30- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 185 Fan EULF-30--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive EULV-30--c-d-eeee 404 p t,pa P,kW 0 400 000 1000 0 00 100 0.5 1 3 4 m 3 /s q v 4000 6000 8000 10000 1000 14000 m 3 /h 0. 0.4 1 3 4 5 10 p d p a r/min 400 00 000 1800 1600 1400 100 1000 800 800 1000 100 1400 1600 1800 000 00 400 r/min 60 LwA,dB 75 80 η,% 85 0 40 100 00 300 3 65 DIN 4166 Class 40 60 80 100 1 00 300 3 66 90 65 J = 0.10 kgm 60 40 0.6 1 3 4 5 10 1 Pa Pa P M,kW Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts p b + p d LwA K = LwA + db 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 800 Pa Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 13M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 31 Fan size EULB-31- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 186 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-31--c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) 4 600 p t,pa P,kW 30 3000 000 1000 0 00 100 m /h 0.5 1 3 4 5 6 6.5m /s 000 6000 10000 14000 18000 000 q v 3 0.5 1 10 J = 0.31 kgm 1 10 16 p d 000 000 max 800 0 0 max 30 3000 80 81 10 0 40 100 00 300 3 80 η,% 10 r/min LwA,dB 80 84 88 9 96 100 800 3000 30 r/min DIN 4166 Class 1 75 70 60 40 r/min kη 30 3000 0 000 10 10 18 Pa 1 P M,kW.998.995.988.976 Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section p a 60 80 10 160 00 40 Pa p b + p d 100 00 300 400 0 600 Pa p g 100 00 300 400 0 Pa LwA K = LwA + db Belt drive EULT-31--c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 160L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 31 Fan size 3 EULB-31-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 187 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-31-3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 570 600 p t,pa P,kW 4000 3000 000 1000 800 600 400 00 1400.981 100 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 8.5m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000m 3 /h 1 1400 J = 0.60 kgm 1600 10 0 1400 p d p a p b + p d p g 1800 1600 1800 00 000 000 00 800 600 max 0 400 400 0 600 80 81 80 η,% 75 0 60 100 00 300 400 LwA K = LwA + db r/min max 300 3000 LwA,dB 86 90 94 98 10 800 3000 300 r/min DIN 4166 Class 1 0 40 60 80 100 10 140 160 10 0 60 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 Pa 100 00 300 400 70 60 40 r/min kη 300 1 3000.999 800.999 600.998 400.996 00.995 000.993 1800.99 1600.986 Pa Pa Pa P M,kW Belt drive EULT-31-3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 3814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 160L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 31 Fan size EULF-31- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 188 Fan EULF-31--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV-31--c-d-eeee 4 p t,pa P,kW 600 000 1000 0 00 100 0.5 1 3 4 5 6 m 3 /s q v 4000 6000 8000 1000 16000 0000 m 3 /h 0. 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 1 p d p a r/min 1700 1600 10 1400 1300 100 1100 1000 900 800 700 600 0 0 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 100 1300 1400 10 1600 1700 r/min p b + p d LwA K = LwA + db 60 LwA,dB 75 80 65 η,% 85 DIN 4166 Class 68 65 J A = 0.4 kgm 0 30 60 100 00 300 0 30 40 60 80 100 00 300Pa 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 90 60 95 40 30 1 4 6 8 10 14 Pa Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 160L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 3 Fan size EULB-3- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 189 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-3--c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) 570 600 p t,pa P,kW 4000 3000 000 1000 800 600 400 00 1400.981 100 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 8.5m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000m 3 /h 1 1400 J = 0.60 kgm 1600 10 0 1400 p d 1800 1600 1800 600 max 0 400 00 000 000 00 400 0 600 r/min max 300 3000 800 800 3000 300 r/min 80 81 80 η,% 75 LwA,dB 86 90 94 98 10 DIN 4166 Class 1 0 60 100 00 300 400 70 60 40 r/min kη 300 1 3000.999 800.999 600.998 400.996 00.995 000.993 1800.99 1600.986 10 0 Pa P M,kW Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section p a 0 40 60 80 100 10 140 160 Pa p b + p d 60 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 Pa p g 100 00 300 400 Pa LwA K = LwA + db Belt drive EULT-3--c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 160L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 3 Fan size 3 EULB-3-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 190 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-3-3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 640 p t,pa P,kW 800 4000 3000 000 1000 0 00 1000.978 100 1 3 5 7 9 11 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 m 3 /h 0.5 1 10 0 5 1000 1000 30 p d 10 0 40 60 80 100 00 300 400 4 Pa p a p b + p d 40 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 Pa p g 1400 100 100 1400 00 max 100 000 1800 1600 1600 1800 000 100 00 r/min max 800 600 400 80 8 η,% 80 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 100 400 LwA K = LwA + db 600 800 r/min DIN 4166 Class 1 0 40 60 80 10 160 00 300 0 40 60 80 100 1 00 300 75 70 60 40 J = 1.00 kgm r/min kη 800 1 600.999 400.999 00.998 000.997 1800.995 1600.993 1400.99 100.986 1.5 10 0 5 Pa Pa P M,kW Belt drive EULT-3-3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 180L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 3 Fan size EULF-3- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 191 Fan EULF-3--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV-3--c-d-eeee 570 600 p t,pa P,kW 000 1000 0 00 100 1 3 4 5 6 7 m 3 /s q v 8000 1000 16000 0000 4000 m 3 /h 0.5 1 6 10 15 p d p a r/min 10 1400 1300 100 1100 1000 900 800 700 600 0 0 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 100 1300 1400 10 r/min p b + p d 0 40 60 80 100 10 160 00 80 LwA K = LwA + db 60 65 η,% LwA,dB 75 80 85 DIN 4166 Class 0 40 60 80 100 10 140 60 100 00 300 400 0 600 90 69 J = 0.38 kgm 65 60 40 1 10 18 Pa Pa Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 160L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 33 Fan size EULB-33- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 19 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-33--c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) 640 p t,pa P,kW 800 4000 3000 000 1000 0 00 1000.978 100 1 3 5 7 9 11 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 m 3 /h 0.5 1 10 0 5 1000 1000 1400 100 100 1400 00 max 100 000 1800 1600 1600 1800 000 100 00 r/min max 800 600 400 80 8 η,% 80 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 100 400 600 800 r/min DIN 4166 Class 1 30 p d 10 0 40 60 80 100 00 300 400 4 Pa 75 70 60 40 J = 1.00 kgm r/min kη 800 1 600.999 400.999 00.998 000.997 1800.995 1600.993 1400.99 100.986 1.5 10 0 5 P M,kW p a 0 40 60 80 10 160 00 300 Pa Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section p b + p d 40 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 p g 0 40 60 80 100 1 00 300 LwA K = LwA + db Pa Pa Belt drive EULT-33--c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) =800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 40 Fan size EULB-40- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 193 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-40--c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 570 600 p t,pa P,kW 4000 3000 000 1000 800 600 400 00 1400.981 100 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 8.5m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000m 3 /h 1 1400 J = 0.60 kgm 1600 10 0 1400 p d p a p b + p d p g 1800 1600 1800 00 000 000 00 800 600 max 0 400 400 0 600 80 81 80 η,% 75 0 60 100 00 300 400 LwA K = LwA + db r/min max 300 3000 LwA,dB 86 90 94 98 10 800 3000 300 r/min DIN 4166 Class 1 0 40 60 80 100 10 140 160 10 0 60 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 Pa 100 00 300 400 70 60 40 r/min kη 300 1 3000.999 800.999 600.998 400.996 00.995 000.993 1800.99 1600.986 Pa Pa Pa P M,kW Belt drive EULT-40--c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 160L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 40 Fan size 3 EULB-40-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 194 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-40-3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 5 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) 640 p t,pa P,kW 800 4000 3000 000 1000 0 00 1000.978 100 1 3 5 7 9 11 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 m 3 /h 0.5 1 10 0 5 1000 1000 1400 100 100 1400 00 max 100 000 1800 1600 1600 1800 000 100 00 r/min max 800 600 400 80 8 η,% 80 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 100 400 600 800 r/min DIN 4166 Class 1 30 p d 10 0 40 60 80 100 00 300 400 4 Pa 75 70 60 40 J = 1.00 kgm r/min kη 800 1 600.999 400.999 00.998 000.997 1800.995 1600.993 1400.99 100.986 1.5 10 0 5 P M,kW p a 0 40 60 80 10 160 00 300 Pa Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section p b + p d 40 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 p g 0 40 60 80 100 1 00 300 LwA K = LwA + db Pa Pa Belt drive EULT-40-3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 180L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 40 Fan size EULF-40- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 195 Fan EULF-40--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV-40--c-d-eeee 570 600 p t,pa P,kW 000 1000 0 00 100 1 3 4 5 6 7 m 3 /s q v 8000 1000 16000 0000 4000 m 3 /h 0.5 1 6 10 15 p d p a r/min 10 1400 1300 100 1100 1000 900 800 700 600 0 0 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 100 1300 1400 10 r/min p b + p d 0 40 60 80 100 10 160 00 80 LwA K = LwA + db 60 65 η,% LwA,dB 75 80 85 DIN 4166 Class 0 40 60 80 100 10 140 60 100 00 300 400 0 600 90 69 J = 0.38 kgm 65 60 40 1 10 18 Pa Pa Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 160L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 41 Fan size EULB-41- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 196 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-41--c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 640 p t,pa P,kW 800 4000 3000 000 1000 0 00 1000.978 100 1 3 5 7 9 11 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 m 3 /h 0.5 1 10 0 5 1000 1000 30 p d 10 0 40 60 80 100 00 300 400 4 Pa p a p b + p d 40 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 Pa p g 1400 100 100 1400 00 max 100 000 1800 1600 1600 1800 000 100 00 r/min max 800 600 400 80 8 η,% 80 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 100 400 LwA K = LwA + db 600 800 r/min DIN 4166 Class 1 0 40 60 80 10 160 00 300 0 40 60 80 100 1 00 300 75 70 60 40 J = 1.00 kgm r/min kη 800 1 600.999 400.999 00.998 000.997 1800.995 1600.993 1400.99 100.986 1.5 10 0 5 Pa Pa P M,kW Belt drive EULT-41--c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) =800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 180L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 41 Fan size 3 EULB-41-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 197 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-41-3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 714 p t,pa P,kW 800 4000 3000 000 1000 0 m /h 800 100 1000.985 00 LwA,dB 75 80 85 90 95 800.975 100 1 4 6 8 10 1 13 m 3 /s 10000 0000 30000 40000 q v 3 0.5 1 800 1 1000 J = 1. kgm 100 1400 4 10 0 30 1000 p d p a p b + p d p g 100 1400 1600 1800 1600 1800 00 max 000 000 00 LwA K = LwA + db r/min max 0 400 400 0 r/min 80 η,% 80 0 100 00 300 8 DIN 4166 Class 1 10 0 30 40 80 10 160 100 00 300 400 0 600 0 30 40 80 10 160 00 40 75 70 60 40 r/min kη 0 1 400 1 00.999 000.998 1800.997 1600.996 1400.994 100.99 10 0 30 35 Pa Pa Pa Pa P M,kW Belt drive EULT-41-3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 41 Fan size EULF-41- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 198 Fan EULF-41--3-d-e-ff-1-h 000 DIN 4166 Class Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV-41--c-d-eeee 640 p t,pa P,kW 800 1000 0 00 100 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 m 3 /s q v 00 10000 100 0000 00 30000 m 3 /h 0.5 1 10 15 p d p a r/min 1300 100 1100 1000 900 800 700 600 0 400 400 0 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 100 1300 r/min p b + p d 60 LwA K = LwA + db 65 LwA,dB 75 80 η,% 85 60 65 60 J= 0.54 kgm 30 40 100 00 300 Pa 40 100 00 300 100 00 300 400 0 600 700 Pa 90 95 40 30 1 10 18 Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 180L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 4 Fan size EULB-4- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 199 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-4--c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) 714 p t,pa P,kW 800 4000 3000 000 1000 0 m /h 800 100 1000.985 00 LwA,dB 75 80 85 90 95 800.975 100 1 4 6 8 10 1 13 m 3 /s 10000 0000 30000 40000 q v 3 0.5 1 800 1 1000 J = 1. kgm 100 1400 4 10 0 30 1000 p d 100 1400 max 000 1600 1800 1600 1800 r/min max 0 400 00 000 00 400 0 r/min 80 η,% 80 0 100 00 300 8 DIN 4166 Class 1 75 70 60 40 r/min kη 0 1 400 1 00.999 000.998 1800.997 1600.996 1400.994 100.99 10 0 30 35 Pa P M,kW Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section p a 10 0 30 40 80 10 160 p b + p d 100 00 300 400 0 600 p g 0 30 40 80 10 160 00 40 LwA K = LwA + db Pa Pa Pa Belt drive EULT-4--c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 4 Fan size 3 EULB-4-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 00 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-4-3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 800 p t,pa P,kW 1000 30 3000 000 1000 0 00 600.97 100 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 m 3 /h 10 0 30 35 p d p a p b + p d p g 800 800 1000 1000 max 1600 100 100 1400 1400 1600 r/min max 100 000 1800 80 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 83 η,% 80 0 100 00 300 10 0 40 80 100 140 180 0Pa LwA K = LwA + db 1800 000 100 r/min DIN 4166 Class 1 100 00 300 400 0 4 10 0 30 35 10 0 40 60 80 100 160 Pa 75 100 70 60 J =.70 kgm 40 r/min k η 100 1 000 1 1800.999 1600.998 1400.997 100.995 1000.991 Pa Pa 800.985 P M,kW Belt drive EULT-4-3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 4 Fan size EULF-4- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 01 Fan EULF-4--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV-4--c-d-eeee 714 800 p t,pa P,kW 000 1000 0 00 100 1 4 6 8 10 m 3 /s q v 00 10000 100 0000 00 30000 300 m 3 /h 1 5 10 14 15 p d p a 100 r/min 1100 1000 900 800 700 600 0 400 400 0 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 100 r/min p b + p d LwA K = LwA + db 60 65 η,% LwA,dB 75 80 85 DIN 4166 Class 70 70 65 J= 0.97 kgm 0 40 60 80 100 10 160 00 10 0 30 40 60 80 100 10 140 160Pa 40 100 00 300 400 0 90 60 40 1 10 18 Pa Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size Fan size EULB-- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 0 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB---c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) 714 p t,pa P,kW 800 4000 3000 000 1000 0 m /h 800 100 1000.985 00 LwA,dB 75 80 85 90 95 800.975 100 1 4 6 8 10 1 13 m 3 /s 10000 0000 30000 40000 q v 3 0.5 1 800 1 1000 J = 1. kgm 100 1400 4 10 0 30 1000 p d 100 1400 max 000 1600 1800 1600 1800 r/min max 0 400 00 000 00 400 0 r/min 80 η,% 80 0 100 00 300 8 DIN 4166 Class 1 75 70 60 40 r/min kη 0 1 400 1 00.999 000.998 1800.997 1600.996 1400.994 100.99 10 0 30 35 Pa P M,kW p a 10 0 30 40 80 10 160 Pa Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section p b + p d 100 00 300 400 0 600 p g 0 30 40 80 10 160 00 40 LwA K = LwA + db Pa Pa Belt drive EULT---c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size Fan size 3 EULB--3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 03 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB--3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) 800 p t,pa P,kW 1000 30 3000 000 1000 0 00 600.97 100 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 m 3 /h 10 0 30 35 p d 800 800 1000 1000 max 1600 100 100 1400 1400 1600 r/min max 100 000 1800 80 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 1800 000 100 r/min 83 η,% 80 DIN 4166 Class 1 0 100 00 300 75 100 70 60 J =.70 kgm 40 r/min k η 100 1 000 1 1800.999 1600.998 1400.997 100.995 1000.991 4 10 0 30 35 Pa 800.985 P M,kW Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section p a 10 0 40 80 100 140 180 0Pa p b + p d 100 00 300 400 0 Pa p g 10 0 40 60 80 100 160 Pa LwA K = LwA + db Belt drive EULT--3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size Fan size EULF-- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 04 Fan EULF---3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV---c-d-eeee 714 800 p t,pa P,kW 000 1000 0 00 100 1 4 6 8 10 m 3 /s q v 00 10000 100 0000 00 30000 300 m 3 /h 1 5 10 14 15 p d p a 100 r/min 1100 1000 900 800 700 600 0 400 400 0 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 100 r/min p b + p d LwA K = LwA + db 60 65 η,% LwA,dB 75 80 85 DIN 4166 Class 70 70 65 J= 0.97 kgm 0 40 60 80 100 10 160 00 10 0 30 40 60 80 100 10 140 160Pa 40 100 00 300 400 0 90 60 40 1 10 18 Pa Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 51 Fan size EULB-51- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 05 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-51--c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 800 p t,pa P,kW 1000 30 3000 000 1000 0 00 600.97 100 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 m 3 /h 10 0 30 35 p d p a p b + p d p g 800 800 1000 1000 max 1600 100 100 1400 1400 1600 r/min max 100 000 1800 80 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 83 η,% 80 0 100 00 300 10 0 40 80 100 140 180 0Pa LwA K = LwA + db 1800 000 100 r/min DIN 4166 Class 1 100 00 300 400 0 4 10 0 30 35 10 0 40 60 80 100 160 Pa 75 100 70 60 J =.70 kgm 40 r/min k η 100 1 000 1 1800.999 1600.998 1400.997 100.995 1000.991 Pa Pa 800.985 P M,kW Belt drive EULT-51--c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 51 Fan size 3 EULB-51-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 06 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-51-3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) 900 p t,pa P,kW 30 3000 000 1000 800 0 105 1000.995 100 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 00 800.99 100 10 0 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 60000 70000 m 3 /h 800 J = 5.40 kgm 4 10 1000 1000 100 100 r/min 80 max 1900 1800 1600 max 14 1400 83 η,% 80 DIN 4166 Class 1 75 70 60 40 r/min kη 1900 1 1800 1 1600.999 1400.999 100.997 10 P M,kW Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 05 06 08 1) 1) 1000 0 30 40 45 p d 1400 14 1600 1800 1900 r/min 0 100 00 300 0 30 40 Pa Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand p a p b + p d p g 10 0 40 80 100 10 140 160 100 00 300 400 0 10 0 40 60 80 100 140 Pa Pa Pa 1) Connection to EU-section LwA K = LwA + db Belt drive EULT-51-3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 51 Fan size EULF-51- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 07 Fan EULF-51--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV-51--c-d-eeee 800 p t,pa P,kW 1000 1800 1000 0 00 m /h 100 3.00 4 6 8 10 1 m 3 /s 10000 0000 30000 40000 q v 3 0.5 300 1 400 J= 1.5 kgm 0 600 4 700 10 18 p d p a r/min 1000 900 800 700 600 0 400 300 800 900 1000 r/min p b + p d LwA K = LwA + db 60 65 η,% LwA,dB 75 80 85 DIN 4166 Class 0 40 60 80 100 10 160 00 0 40 60 80 100 10 140 160 180 00 70 71 70 90 100 160 00 300 400 65 60 40 10 0 Pa Pa Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size 00L. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 53 Fan size EULB-53- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 08 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-53--c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) 900 p t,pa P,kW 30 3000 000 1000 800 0 105 1000.995 100 LwA,dB 80 85 90 95 00 800.99 100 10 0 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 60000 70000 m 3 /h 800 J = 5.40 kgm 4 10 1000 1000 100 100 r/min 80 max 1900 1800 1600 max 14 1400 83 η,% 80 DIN 4166 Class 1 75 70 60 40 r/min kη 1900 1 1800 1 1600.999 1400.999 100.997 10 P M,kW Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 05 06 08 1) 1) 1000 0 30 40 45 p d 1400 14 1600 1800 1900 r/min 0 100 00 300 0 30 40 Pa Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section p a p b + p d p g LwA K = LwA + db 10 0 40 80 100 10 140 160 100 00 300 400 0 10 0 40 60 80 100 140 Pa Pa Pa Belt drive EULT-53--c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Max. motor size M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 53 Fan size 3 EULB-53-3 FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 09 Fan Version (c) 3 = normal, 4 = heavy-duty EULB-53-3-c-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without 1 = with inlet guide vanes = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) 4 = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller, side withdrawable impeller) only for c = 4 Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand, = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section 1000 p t,pa P,kW 100 30 3000 000 1000 0 00 100 4 8 1 16 0 4 m 3 /s q v 0000 30000 40000 000 60000 70000 80000 m 3 /h 1.5 600 3 700 4 10 0 30 40 45 p d 700 600 p b + p d p g 800 1400 GXLBmax 13 1300 1000 900 1000 1100 1100 100 0 40 60 80 100 1 00 300 85 η,% 900 LwA,dB 80 90 95 100 105 800 100 1300 13 1400 J L = 5. kgm 10 J H = 7.70 kgm p a 100 00 300 400 0 10 15 0 30 40 60 70 80 90 100 LwA K = LwA + db r/min GXHBmax 1660 1600 10 1600 1660 DIN 4166 Class 1 0 40 60 80 100 10 140 160 180 00 Pa 80 70 60 40 10 0 30 40 Pa r/min 1660 1 1600 1 Pa Pa 10 1 1400.999 1300.999 100.998 1100.998 1000.997 900.996 800.994 700.99 P M,kW η-korr Belt drive EULT-53-3-c-d-eeee Version (c) 1 = normal = heavy duty 3 = normal with one extra belt 4 = heavy duty with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts 6 = heavy duty, min. two belts Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Unit size 53 Fan size EULF-53- FAN CHART SPECIFICATION MOTOR DATA Page 10 Fan EULF-53--3-d-e-ff-1-h Equipment (d) 0 = without = air flow meter 3 = spark-proof design 4 = spark-proof design + air flow meter Material (e) 1 = galvanized = stainless (epoxy-painted fan casing and impeller) Inlet and discharge (ff) Cross section of inlet 01 0 03 04 1) 05 06 08 1) Inspection side (h) 1 = right-hand = left-hand 1) Connection to EU-section Belt drive Version (c) 1 = normal 3 = normal with one extra belt 5 = normal, min. two belts EULV-53--c-d-eeee 900 p t,pa P,kW 1000 1800 1000 0 00 100 3 5 10 15 m 3 /s q v 10000 0000 30000 40000 000 m 3 /h 1 300 400 J = 3.60 kgm 0 4 600 10 0 p d p a r/min 8 800 700 600 0 400 300 700 800 8 r/min p b + p d LwA K = LwA + db 60 65 η,% 0 40 60 80 100 10 160 00 Pa 0 40 60 80 100 10 40 100 160 00 300 400 70 LwA,dB 75 80 85 DIN 4166 Class 71 90 70 60 40 10 0 6 Pa Pa P M,kW Belt guard (d) 0 = without 1 = totally enclosing belt guard, galvanized = totally enclosing belt guard, epoxy-painted steel Fan speed, r/min (eeee) Motor See section B 3818 APAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ATAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 ARAM-a-bbbbb-c-0 Select the number of poles for the motor as follows: Hz Fan speed ) = 800 344 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 345 r/min or above = -pole motor 60 Hz Fan speed ) = 800 814 r/min = 4-pole motor Fan speed ) = 815 r/min or above = -pole motor ) For two-speed operation, select the higher speed. Max. motor size M. For detailed particulars of electric motors, see section B 3818.

Page 11 CONTENTS Page Rotary energy exchanger with hygroscopic rotor...1 Energy savings...1 Reduction in the ratings of the air heaters and coolers...1 The process in the Mollier chart...13 Hygroscopic rotor...13 Frosting Defrosting, Frosting limit, Frosting lime...14 Filters...15 Leakage flows and locations of fans...16 Purging sector Carry-over, Locations of the fans...16 Installation examples...17 EUQA Humidifier...19 Connection to water system, Control...19 Humidification...0 Water quality...1 Water consumption... MOLLIER chart for moist air...3 CIBS psychrometric chart...4

REGOTERM EUMF RECOVERY UNIT Page 1 Rotary energy exchanger with hygroscopic rotor The hygroscopic rotor recovers heat and moisture at a very high efficiency. During the winter, this will often eliminate the extremely dry air conditions occurring indoors in cold weather. In systems employing humidification, the moisture recovery in the hygroscopic rotor will often enable the humidifier rating to be reduced. Moisture transfer also minimises the risk of frosting in the rotor. During the summer, when the outdoor air is warmer and more humid than the exhaust air, the supply air will be dehumidified and cooled, i.e. cooling energy will be recovered. Fläkt Woods has a computer program which can be used for simple and reliable determination of the energy savings and the reduction in the equipment ratings. Enthalpy duration chart Enthalpy kj/kg Reduction in equipment ratings due to cooling energy recovery Energy savings The energy savings achieved by installing the REGOTERM recovery unit in a system is dependent on several factors. The most important of these are the climatic conditions, the operating time and the difference between the supply air and exhaust air temperatures. The adjacent figure provides a good illustration of the energy savings attainable for heating and cooling the outdoor air to the required supply temperature when a REGOTERM heat recovery unit is installed. It should be borne in mind that the energy saving is generally much greater than the temperature efficiency would suggest. As an example, a rotary heat exchanger with a temperature efficiency of 75% may often give an energy recovery of 90 95%. Reduction in the ratings of the air heaters and coolers Appreciable savings are normally made on the ratings of the heating equipment when a REGOTERM recovery unit is installed. Savings are also achieved in the investment cost, since the heat output of the boiler and the ratings of the air heaters can be substantially reduced. If a REGOTERM unit is installed for cooling energy recovery, the cooling capacity necessary will be substantially lower, which will reduce the ratings of the refrigeration unit and the air coolers. Reduction in equipment ratings due to heat recovery 1 Heat energy saved by REGOTERM Heat energy demand, with REGOTERM 1 + Heat energy demand, without REGOTERM 3 Cooling energy saved by by REGOTERM 4 Cooling energy demand, with REGOTERM 3 + 4 Cooling energy demand, without REGOTERM

REGOTERM EUMF RECOVERY UNIT Page 13 The process in the Mollier chart The energy exchanger process in the hygroscopic rotor is shown in the Mollier charts below. The air conditions downstream of the rotor are dependent on the outdoor air the exhaust air condition, the heat exchanger efficiency and the supply/exhaust air flow ratio. Mollier chart for moist air Air at 5 to +40 C Hygroscopic rotor Through both high heat and moisture recovery, the change in the condition of the air may therefore be described taking place along a straight interconnecting line between the supply air (outdoor air) and exhaust air inlet conditions. During the winter, this will often eliminate the extremely dry air conditions occurring indoors in cold weather. In systems employing humidification, the humidifier rating can often be reduced as a result of the moisture recovery in the hygroscopic rotor. Moisture transfer also minimises the risk of frosting in the rotor. During the summer, when the outdoor air is warmer and more humid than the exhaust air, the supply air will be dehumidified and cooled, i.e. cooling energy will be recovered. In new installations, significant reductions in the ratings of the heating and cooling equipment can be achieved when the REGOTERM system is installed for heat recovery and cooling energy recovery.

REGOTERM EUMF RECOVERY UNIT Page 14 Frosting Defrosting Frosting of such magnitude that it increases the pressure drop across the rotor normally takes several hours. The frosting problem is therefore often reduced, since the outdoor temperature varies over a 4-hour period and since the heat exchanger may be in operation for only part of a 4-hour period. Mollier chart for moist air Air at 5 to +40 C Frosting limit Frosting will occur only if excess water condenses out on the surfaces of the heat exchanger, at the same time as the supply air inlet temperature is below 10 C. This is a fairly accurate figure for different air flows, at full rotor speed and for typical exhaust air temperatures in comfort ventilation applications. In the hygroscopic rotor, excess water will be formed on the heat exchanger surfaces as soon as the interconnecting line between the supply air and exhaust air inlet conditions intersects the saturation curve in the Mollier chart. Frosting time As an example, it will take about 8 hours for the pressure drop to increase by % when the saturation curve is intersected as shown in Fig. 1. Note that these frosting times are applicable only if the temperature and moisture conditions are constant throughout the frosting period. But the frosting time may be appreciably longer, since the temperature often varies. Experience has shown that, as a result of factors such as variations in the operating time and supply air temperature, the saturation curve can be intersected by a minor amount without significant frosting occurring, even if the outdoor temperature is below 10 C. The frosting process in a hygroscopic rotor

Filters REGOTERM EUMF RECOVERY UNIT Page 15 Experience has shown that, when in operation, the rotor of the REGOTERM is very unlikely to become clogged, in spite of the dense pattern of flow passages in the rotor. This is due to the fact that the direction of air flow through the rotor is continually reversed, which produces an excellent self-cleaning effect. Moreover, the air flow through the rotor is laminar, which reduces further the likelihood of clogging. If the air has high dust concentration, the particles usually adhere to the face of the rotor, and very seldom to the insides of the air passages. As a result, the particles are blown off the rotor face when the direction of air flow is reversed. In most systems, the rotor is stationary during certain periods of the year. To protect the rotor from the risk of deposits and clogging, the supply air filter in the system should be located upstream of the rotor. The heat recovery unit should always be provided with equipment for purging operation (see example 3 on page 17). If the rotor should become clogged, it can normally be cleaned simply by vacuum-cleaning. Compressed air, low-pressure steam and certain types of grease solvents can also be used. A filter should always be installed in the supply and exhaust air ducts upstream of the rotor. To prevent fouling and clogging of the rotor during the construction period, the appropriate filters should be installed and the rotor should be running when the fans in the system are run. EUPA pleated 1) filter Frånluft Exhaust air Outdoor Uteluft air Tilluft Supply air Grille ) EUPB,C bag filter 1) The grade of filter should be selected to suit the requirements of the premises.

REGOTERM EUMF RECOVERY UNIT Page 16 Leakage flows and locations of fans Leakage of exhaust air into the supply air in the heat recovery unit can be eliminated by installing the fans as shown in Fig. 1 and. The pressure differentials between the supply and exhaust air ducts on both sides of the heat exchanger should be such that p1 is greater than p4 and p is greater than p3. If necessary, this can be achieved by installing a pressure-adjusting damper as shown in Fig. 1 and. Leakage across the seals can be minimised by ensuring that the pressure differential between the supply and exhaust air ducts is as small as possible. The leakage across the seals is normally 1 4% of the total flow. Purging sector Carry-over If the purging sector has been correctly adjusted to suit the prevailing pressure conditions, complete purging of the rotor will take place, without loss of supply air. On the other hand, a certain proportion of the supply air will be transferred to the exhaust air by carry-over. This will take place at the point where the rotor moves over from the supply air duct into the exhaust air duct. The proportion of air carried over in relation to the supply air flow is approx. 3% at p = 100 Pa and approx. 1.5% at p = 00 Pa, regardless of the heat exchanger size (at a rotor speed of 0 r/min). Locations of the fans Recovery unit on the suction sides of both fans Pressure conditions which will ensure that the air leakage is from the supply air side to the exhaust air side can easily be achieved. Fig. 1 Heat recovery unit on the discharge sides of both fans Fig. Pressure-adjusting damper Pressure-adjusting damper Room Room Recovery unit on the suction side of the supply air fan and on the discharge side of the exhaust air fan This arrangement can only be used if leakage of exhaust air into the supply air is permissible. The fans run at the same air flow rates, even on air recirculation. Room Fig. 3 Recirculated air damper Constant speed If the rotor runs at constant speed, the temperature efficiency of the heat exchanger will also be constant. A constant-speed heat exchanger is therefore used primarily: in air handling units with cooling energy recovery if no demands are made for maintaining the supply air temperature constant.

REGOTERM EUMF RECOVERY UNIT Page 17 AS RC K = Speed controller = Control unit = Contactor Control symbols M = Temperature transducer = Geared electric motor ST SV Starting an air handling unit with rotary energy exchanger = Damper control motor = Control valve = Supply air = Exhaust air Example. Purging operation Purging operation should be employed whenever the heat exchanger rotor is stationary for extended periods of time in an environment in which the supply air or exhaust air contains dust likely to form deposits. Dust which may have collected in the rotor flow passages is blown away due to the continuously reversing direction of air flow through the rotor. Purging operation should preferably be started -3 times a day by means of a timer SU, and on each such occasion, the rotor should be run at maximum speed for about 5 minutes. Timer SU should be ordered separately. To prevent the direct admission of cold outdoor air when an air handling unit with rotary heat exchanger is started, the following starting procedure is recommended: Assume that the time is 0 when the air handling unit is started. The outdoor and exhaust air dampers open and the recirculated air damper closes. After seconds, the exhaust air fan and the rotor of the rotary heat exchanger start. After 70 seconds, the supply air fan starts. The temperature controller regulates the rotor speed operating status. This starting procedure also ensures that the rotor will be purged every time the air handling unit is started. Example 1. Cooling energy recovery Constant rotorspeed When the outdoor temperature is higher than the exhaust air temperature (as sensed by temperature sensors GT1 and GT of the EURZ-03 differential thermostat), the rotor will run at maximum speed. Constant speed Example 3. Frosting detector The frosting detector is used to indicate frosting in the rotor, which is likely to occur at very low outdoor temperatures and high humidity of the exhaust air. For further details concerning the risk of frosting, see page 16. When the rotor runs at constant speed, defrosting is carried out by using a damper to by-pass the supply air across the rotor, or by stopping the supply air fan. The differential pressure switch indicates when the damper should be opened or when the fan should be stopped. For connections, see separate instruction. Differential pressure switch GP should be ordered separately. Room 1) EURZ-03 differential thermostat should be ordered separately. Design particulars GP = Differential pressure switch brand and type: Billman LGW3, Honeywell C6045D, Stäfa AFS 93, TAAFS93, SAAS AFS93. Control signal, heat recovery

REGOTERM EUMF RECOVERY UNIT Page 18 Example 4. Speed detector The speed detector consists of one magnetic sensor and an alarm relay EURZ-0-. The alarm relay is set to delay the alarm by 10 s. This time corresponds to the lowest rotor speed of approx. 0.5 r/min. To prevent an alarm under conditions when the rotor is intentionally stationary, the alarm relay should be wired so that an alarm will only be initiated when the rotor does not rotate, even though the system calls for heat recovery or cooling energy recovery (see the installation instructions). If the rotor is driven at variable speed, this function is incorporated into the speed controller. When an alarm has been initiated: the heat exchanger drive motor will stop. the supply and exhaust air fans will remain in operation. an alarm will be indicated. Pulsing Magnetdevice Inductive Magnetischen pulse detector Geber GS1 Alarm Larm, (lamp lampa or e. the dyl. like) Alarmrelais relay GS Rotor Example 5. Locations of temperature sensors In order to ensure that they sense representative temperatures, the temperature sensors should not be located immediately downstream of the heat exchanger, since the air temperature always varies across the duct cross-section downstream of the rotor, and the readings may therefore be incorrect. If temperature sensors are fitted in the supply air duct, they should be located as far as possible from the heat exchanger, where the temperature across the duct cross-section is uniform. A suitable location of the sensor is, for instance, downstream of the supply air fan, where the air has been thoroughly mixed. Room Temperature sensor

Page 19 EUQA HUMIDIFIER Connection to water system One or more humidifiers are connected to a central water tank (see fig. 1) provided with a circulation pump. The pressure pipe is connected to the constant flow valve of the humidifier (see fig. ). The pipe is provided with a shut-off valve, to make it possible to remove the constant flow valve for cleaning. Required water pressure in front of the constant flow valve = 00 kpa, maximum 1000 kpa ( kp/cm, maximum 10 kp/cm). The inlet has less than 3 l/min connection size 15 mm (BSP 1/") female and size 3 mm (BSP 3/4") from 7 l/min. 1. Tank. Coarse-particle filter 3. Pump 4. Fine-particle filter; (porosity 00-0 µm 5. Non-return valve 6. Control valve 7. Constant flow valve 8. Pressure gauge (1 per complete humidifier) 9. Shut-off valve 10. Float valve 11. Solenoid valve 1. Connection for water supply; 1/" or 3/4" female thread 13. Connection for return water; 1 1/4" male thread 14. Connection for float valve; size of connection depends on water consumption and available water pressure 15. Connection for draining tank (pipe to be laid to scupper) 16. Pipe to scupper overflow 17. Bleed off 18. Water trap 19. Sight glass 0. Humidifier fill Control A solenoid valve stops the water supply, when the fan shuts down, and when the outside temperature is higher than approx. 0 C (controlled from the thermostat GT1). Another thermostat (GT), (not included at delivery), preset to approx. 11 C, should be placed after the humidifier, controlling the valve of the preheating air heater. Reheating air heater control will vary with type of system. 10 3 1 11 1 4 9 8 7 9 5 6 1. Water supply pipe, 1/" o.d. from tank. Shut-off valve 3. EUAZ-08 water trap (accessory) return water to tank 4. Drain pipe, 1 1/4" i.d. 5. Humidifier fill 6. Droplet eliminator 7. Spray pipe 8. End plug 9. Side wall 10. Water filter, max. 0 µm mesh (not included) 11. Connection for flushing hose 1. Constant-flow valve Fig. 1